Category: Covid 19

MIL-OSI New Zealand: Burkina Faso
Source: New Zealand Ministry of Foreign Affairs and Trade – Safe Travel
- Reviewed: 4 November 2024, 14:48 NZDT
- Still current at: 4 November 2024
Related news features

If you are planning international travel at this time, please read our COVID-19 related travel advice here, alongside our destination specific travel advice below.

Do not travel to Burkina Faso due to the volatile security situation and the high threat of kidnapping, terrorism and armed banditry (level 4 of 4).

Burkina Faso

Terrorism
There is a high threat of terrorism in Burkina Faso, particularly in border areas with Mali and Niger. States of emergencies remain in place in several border regions. In 2018, terrorist groups released a statement declaring their intention to target westerners and western companies in the Sahel. There have been multiple attacks in the capital and elsewhere in the country since 2016, including:
- On 11 June 2022, over 100 people were killed in an attack in Seytenga, Seno Province.
- On 4 and 5 June 2021, over 160 people were killed in attack on Solhan village, in the northeast.
- On 26 April 2021, 3 foreign nationals were killed in an ambush on the PK 60 road between Fada-N’Gourma and Pama.
- On 1 December 2019, at least 14 people were killed in a shooting attack inside a church in Hantoukoura.
- On 5 November 2019, 37 people were killed and a further 60 injured in an attack on a convoy carrying workers to a Canadian gold mine near Boungou.
- On March 2, 2018, extremists attacked the French Embassy and Burkina Faso’s military headquarters in downtown Ouagadougou. Eight security force personnel, including soldiers and police officers were killed and over 80 others were injured.
- On 13 August 2017, gunmen attacked the Aziz Istanbul restaurant in Ouagadougou, killing at least 18 people.
- On 15 January 2016, armed gunmen attacked the Splendid Hotel and Café Cappuccino in Ouagadougou resulted in 30 deaths, a large number of whom were foreign nationals.
Terrorist attacks could occur at anytime, anywhere in Burkina Faso and may be directed at locations with foreign interests or known to be frequented by foreigners, such as embassies, hotels, bars, restaurants, markets, airports, shopping areas, tourist sites, public transport facilities, mining operations and places of worship.

New Zealanders throughout Burkina Faso are advised to maintain a high degree of security awareness at all times, particularly in public areas. Avoid all large gatherings, including music festivals, concerts, sporting events and any public demonstrations or protests. Keep yourself informed of potential risks to safety and security by monitoring the media and other local sources of information and follow the instructions of local authorities at all times.

Kidnapping
There is a heightened threat of kidnapping in Burkina Faso. Terrorist groups such as Al Qaeda in the Islamic Maghreb (AQIM) have stated their intention to kidnap foreigners and may cross the borders from Mali and Niger to carry out kidnappings.

A number of foreigners have previously been kidnapped in Burkina Faso and the wider Sahel region. In April 2022, a Polish national was kidnapped in north-eastern Burkina Faso and in September 2022, a US national was kidnapped in Yalgo, also in north-eastern Burkina Faso. The threat is likely to continue.

New Zealanders in Burkina Faso are strongly advised to seek professional security advice or protection before travelling to areas of particular risk.

Political Situation/Civil Unrest
The security situation has deteriorated significantly in recent years. The political situation continues to evolve following the military coup on 30 September 2022.

Demonstrations occur regularly and have taken place in major cities. They have the potential to result in violence or clashes, gunfire has been reported in Ougadougou. Expect an increased security presence country-wide and comply with any instructions issued by the local authorities, including any curfews or restrictions of movement. Continued disruptions to internet and other telecommunication services are possible.

New Zealanders in Burkina Faso are advised to avoid all protests, demonstrations and large gatherings.

Banditry
Banditry is a security concern in Burkina Faso. There continue to be reports of attacks by armed criminals on vehicles, including buses, travelling on a variety of main and secondary roads across the country. Criminals have used road blocks to stop and rob travellers and have been known to open fire on vehicles that refuse to stop. While bandits mainly steal valuables, they may physically harm victims during the course of a robbery.

The highest number of incidents occur in the eastern region but there have been a number of attacks in other regions and the threat exists throughout Burkina Faso. Remote and border regions are especially vulnerable.

New Zealanders in Burkina Faso are advised to travel in convoy if possible, stay on clearly marked roads and avoid travel by night outside major centres. You should seek local advice before setting out and follow a police patrol where possible.

Crime
Street crime is prevalent in Burkina Faso and foreigners may be specifically targeted due to their perceived wealth. Bag-snatchings, muggings and theft from hotel rooms are common, particularly in Ouagadougou. The central market and the area around the United Nations circle are often targeted by thieves. Theft is often perpetrated by one or two people on motorbikes.

Criminals in urban areas may carry knives in order to cut straps on bags and can become violent if the victim is non-compliant. Sexual assault occurs periodically in smaller towns and within Ouagadougou.

New Zealanders are advised to exercise particular vigilance in crowded or public areas, avoid showing signs of affluence and keep personal belongings secure at all times.

When driving you should keep doors locked, windows up and keep any valuables out of sight. Avoid travelling alone at night, as risks increase after dark.

Scams
Commercial and internet fraud is a common problem in Burkino Faso. New Zealanders in Burkina Faso should be wary of any offers that seem too good to be true, as they may be a scam. For further information see our advice on Internet Fraud and International Scams and Internet dating scams.

General Travel Advice
As there is no New Zealand diplomatic presence in Burkina Faso, the ability of the government to provide consular assistance to New Zealand citizens is extremely limited.

We offer advice to New Zealanders about contingency planning that travellers to Burkina Faso should consider.

New Zealanders are advised to respect religious and social traditions in Burkina Faso to avoid offending local sensitivities.

Modern medical services in Burkina Faso are very limited, New Zealanders travelling or living in Burkina Faso should have a comprehensive travel insurance policy in place that includes provision for medical evacuation by air.

New Zealanders in Burkina Faso are strongly encouraged to register their details with the Ministry of Foreign Affairs and Trade.

Travel tips

See our regional advice for Africa

Top of page

MIL OSI New Zealand News –
January 26, 2025
MIL-OSI Security: Former Miami-Dade Corrections Officer Pled Guilty to $150,000 COVID-19 Fraud

Source: United States Department of Justice (National Center for Disaster Fraud)

MIAMI – Yesterday, Daniel Fleureme, 56, of Miami-Dade County, a former Miami-Dade Corrections and Rehabilitation Department (MDCRD) Corrections Officer, pled guilty to wire fraud for defrauding a COVID-19 relief program by fraudulently obtaining an Economic Injury Disaster Loan from the U. S. Small Business Administration (SBA).

The Coronavirus Aid, Relief and Economic Security (CARES) Act was designed to provide emergency financial assistance to the millions of Americans who were suffering the economic effects caused by the COVID-19 pandemic. One source of relief provided by the CARES Act were Economic Injury Disaster Loans (EIDLs) to eligible small businesses experiencing substantial financial disruptions. These EIDLs were provided directly to borrowers by the SBA.

On July 27, 2020, Fleureme, while he was employed full-time by MDCRD as a Corrections Officer, submitted to the SBA a false and fraudulent EIDL application claiming to be the 100% owner of a sole proprietorship operating under the company legal and DBA names of “Daniel Fleureme.” In this fraudulent application, Fleureme claimed that he had owned the business since its creation on Feb. 15, 2017, and stated that the business had three employees as of Jan. 31, 2020. Fleureme’s EIDL application also falsely certified that for the 12-month period prior to Jan. 31, 2020, his sole proprietorship had gross revenues of $450,000 and a cost of goods sold of only $97,000. As a result of this fraudulent EIDL application, Fleureme received approximately $150,000 in EIDL proceeds from the SBA.

He is scheduled to be sentenced on Jan. 7, 2025, at 11:00 a.m., before U.S. District Judge Jose E. Martinez in Miami. Fleureme faces up to 20 years in prison for the wire fraud conviction. The court will determine any sentence after considering the U.S. Sentencing Guidelines and other statutory factors.

U.S. Attorney for the Southern District of Florida Markenzy Lapointe and Special Agent in Charge Jeffrey B. Veltri of the FBI, Miami Field Office, Inspector General Felix Jimenez of the Miami-Dade County Office of Inspector General (M-DC OIG), and Special Agent in Charge Amaleka McCall-Brathwaite, U.S. Small Business Administration Office of Inspector General (SBA OIG), Eastern Region, made the announcement.

The FBI’s Miami Area Corruption Task Force, which includes task force officers from the M-DC OIG, working in conjunction with SBA OIG, investigated the case. Assistant U.S. Attorney Edward N. Stamm is prosecuting the case.

On May 17, 2021, the Attorney General established the COVID-19 Fraud Enforcement Task Force to marshal the resources of the Department of Justice in partnership with agencies across government to enhance efforts to combat and prevent pandemic-related fraud. The Task Force bolsters efforts to investigate and prosecute the most culpable domestic and international criminal actors and assists agencies tasked with administering relief programs to prevent fraud by, among other methods, augmenting and incorporating existing coordination mechanisms, identifying resources and techniques to uncover fraudulent actors and their schemes, and sharing and harnessing information and insights gained from prior enforcement efforts. For more information on the department’s response to the pandemic, please visit https://www.justice.gov/coronavirus.

On Sept. 15, 2022, the Attorney General selected the Southern District of Florida’s U.S. Attorney’s Office to head one of three national COVID-19 Fraud Strike Force Teams. The Department of Justice established the Strike Force to enhance existing efforts to combat and prevent COVID-19 related financial fraud. The Strike Force combines law enforcement and prosecutorial resources and focuses on large-scale, multistate pandemic relief fraud perpetrated by criminal organizations and transnational actors, as well as those who committed multiple instances of pandemic relief fraud. The Strike Force uses prosecutor-led and data analyst-driven teams to identify and bring to justice those who stole pandemic relief funds. Additional information regarding the Strike Force may be found at https://www.justice.gov/opa/pr/justice-department-announces-covid-19-fraud-strike-force-teams.

Anyone with information about allegations of attempted fraud involving COVID-19 can report it by calling the Department of Justice’s National Center for Disaster Fraud (NCDF) Hotline at 866-720-5721 or via the NCDF Web Complaint Form at https://www.justice.gov/disaster-fraud/ncdf-disaster-complaint-form.

Related court documents and information may be found on the website of the District Court for the Southern District of Florida at www.flsd.uscourts.gov or at http://pacer.flsd.uscourts.gov, under case number 24-cr-20407.

###

MIL Security OSI –

January 26, 2025
MIL-OSI USA: Chairman Cotton Statement on CIA Findings on Covid Origins

US Senate News:

Source: United States Senator for Arkansas Tom Cotton
FOR IMMEDIATE RELEASEContact: Caroline Tabler or Patrick McCann (202) 224-2353January 25, 2025
Chairman Cotton Statement on CIA Findings on Covid Origins
Washington, D.C. — Senator Tom Cotton (R-Arkansas), Chairman of the Senate Intelligence Committee, released the following statement about the CIA’s findings on the origins of the Coronavirus:
“I’ve said from the beginning that Covid likely originated in the Wuhan labs. Communist China covered it up and the liberal media covered for them. I’m pleased the CIA concluded in the final days of the Biden administration that the lab-leak theory is the most plausible explanation of Covid’s origins and I commend Director Ratcliffe for fulfilling his promise to release this conclusion. Now, the most important thing is to make China pay for unleashing a plague on the world.”

MIL OSI USA News –

January 26, 2025
MIL-OSI Global: The next president will play a key role in shaping US trade policy – here’s what voters need to know

Source: The Conversation – USA – By Bedassa Tadesse, Professor of Economics, University of Minnesota Duluth

From the ports of Los Angeles to the cornfields of Iowa, the U.S.’s international trade policy is a force that shapes the lives of every American. With the presidential election looming in November 2024, discussing trade policy isn’t just an academic exercise – it’s a civic responsibility.

As an economist, I have spent years studying this topic. Trade policy has profound effects on how industries operate, from production locations to competitive dynamics. These changes impact everyday life, from the cost of your morning coffee to the job security in your local community.

And, because the president has extensive control over trade policy, every presidential election is a referendum on the issue.

The two most recent administrations – President Donald Trump and Vice President Mike Pence from 2017 to 2021 and President Joe Biden and Vice President Kamala Harris from 2021 to today – have had starkly different approaches to trade policy. The contrast shows how a president’s economic philosophy can reshape the nation’s global business strategy.

Both Trump and Harris are on the ballot in November. Harris is expected to carry on Biden’s trade policies if she wins. This comparison offers insight into how the next U.S. president will govern on trade.

2017-2021: Trump and Pence on trade

Trump pursued a protectionist trade agenda during his time in office.

Protectionism refers to government policies that limit international trade to benefit domestic industries. These measures include tariffs – taxes on imported goods – quotas and regulations that make imports more expensive.

One of Trump’s first acts in office was withdrawing from the Trans-Pacific Partnership — a colossal 12-nation pact that would have covered 40% of global output. His decision cost America both access to lucrative Asian markets and a powerful counterweight to China’s economic influence.

Closer to home, Trump renegotiated the North American Free Trade Agreement (NAFTA) into the United States-Mexico-Canada Agreement,
tightening rules for automakers. The effect? While wages for workers in the automotive industry and vehicle prices for American consumers increased, it barely spurred any additional domestic car production.

Trump also launched a tariff-driven trade war with China and the European Union, asserting it would address unfair practices and reduce the U.S. trade deficit. The strategy, however, prompted retaliatory tariffs, resulting in higher consumer prices and job losses in U.S. industries dependent on imported components. While some sectors benefited from the approach, American farmers suffered due to export losses, necessitating government subsidies.

Trump and his new running mate, JD Vance, have signaled their intent to revive the “America First” trade strategy. Their campaign platform calls for sweeping tariffs, including a blanket 10% tariff on all goods and a more aggressive 60% tariff specifically targeting Chinese products.

2021-today: Biden and Harris on trade

In contrast, the Biden-Harris administration adopted a multilateral approach emphasizing cooperation between countries.

The administration maintained most of Trump’s tariffs on Chinese goods and some on steel and aluminum imports from other countries. However, they reframed the measures as part of a broader push to rein in climate change and protect workers’ rights.

The administration also launched initiatives like the Indo-Pacific Economic Framework for Prosperity, or IPEF, signaling a return to Obama-era trade strategies prioritizing regional partnerships in the Pacific. The IPEF aims to strengthen economic ties with Asian countries by coordinating policies to enhance supply chain resilience and promote clean energy rather than focusing solely on tariff reductions.

The Biden-Harris approach emphasizes international cooperation while valuing domestic job creation, particularly in clean energy and manufacturing. However, maintaining many of Trump’s tariffs on Chinese goods, steel and aluminum has kept costs high for some U.S. businesses and consumers.

Building on the Biden administration’s policies, the Harris campaign has signaled its aim to shield lower- and middle-income households from new tariffs that could raise prices while maintaining a tough stance on China through existing tariffs and trade restrictions.

Presidential powers and influence on trade

The president plays a critical role in setting America’s trade policy.

The president can negotiate international trade deals, although Congress must approve them to become law. The executive branch also controls tariffs; under statutes such as the Trade Act of 1974, the president can impose them without congressional approval.

In addition, the president can declare national emergencies related to trade, appoint trade representatives, issue executive orders to manage federal trade policies, and impose sanctions that can influence global trade dynamics.

Free trade agreements can boost exports and promote economic growth, but they may also displace certain workers. In contrast, tariffs on imports protect some domestic industries but raise prices for American consumers. Studies show that tariffs imposed under Trump, and continued by Biden, have led to higher prices, reduced output and lower employment, harming the U.S. economy.

Trade policies also affect diplomatic relationships and global supply chains. So, as voters sift through the candidates’ trade policy positions, they must look beyond the soundbites. Understanding how each approach affects job markets, consumer prices and global competitiveness will help voters cast an informed ballot that aligns with their vision for the country’s future.

In the world of trade, every vote counts.

Bedassa Tadesse does not work for, consult, own shares in or receive funding from any company or organization that would benefit from this article, and has disclosed no relevant affiliations beyond their academic appointment.

– ref. The next president will play a key role in shaping US trade policy – here’s what voters need to know – https://theconversation.com/the-next-president-will-play-a-key-role-in-shaping-us-trade-policy-heres-what-voters-need-to-know-241301

MIL OSI – Global Reports –

January 25, 2025
MIL-OSI Economics: Per Jacobsson Lecture 2024 — Ngozi Okonjo-Iweala: “Delivering on new global challenges: How can we keep multilateral coherence whilst re-imagining the multilateral trading system?”

Source: WTO

Headline: Per Jacobsson Lecture 2024 — Ngozi Okonjo-Iweala: “Delivering on new global challenges: How can we keep multilateral coherence whilst re-imagining the multilateral trading system?”

Excellencies, Dear Raghu, Minouche, Maury, ladies and gentlemen, friends,
Thank you. What an honor to follow in the footsteps of previous Per Jacobsson lecturers – all the more so in this 80th anniversary year of the Bretton Woods Conference.
We are living in troubled times – something Per Jacobsson knew well. So far as trade is concerned, the times are not only troubled, they are tense. Trade is sometimes blamed and scapegoated for poor outcomes that really derive from macroeconomic, technology, or social policy, for which trade is not responsible.
Trade policies and tools are being deployed not just to solve trade-related problems, but also to try to address security and geopolitical concerns.
As unilateral measures or threats thereof become increasingly widespread, trade policy has been getting more restrictive. In recent months, the US, the EU, Turkey, and Canada have introduced new tariffs and countervailing duties on Chinese electric vehicles and other products, including steel. China has countered with WTO disputes and measures against EU products such as dairy, pork, and brandy.
These are among the over 130 new trade-restricting measures recorded by the WTO Secretariat since the start of this year. This number represents an 8% increase to the stockpile of over 1600 restrictive measures introduced between 2009 and 2023, which as of last year were already affecting over 10% of world goods trade. In addition, WTO members initiated 210 trade remedy investigations in the first half of 2024 – nearly as many as in all of 2023. While not all will culminate in the imposition of duties, investigations have a well-documented chilling effect on trade. And I haven’t even mentioned subsidies yet.
Frictions are manifesting as trade disputes. Six of the eight WTO disputes initiated this year deal with green technologies, particularly electric vehicles.
I hope we are not on a path that leads back to the sort of economic disorder that came before Bretton Woods – disorder that was followed by political extremism and war.
It was precisely to avoid a repeat of such circumstances that the multilateral economic institutions were created. My concern today is that we have forgotten this lesson – that we have forgotten the good these institutions have done.
Walking away from the legacy of Bretton Woods, including the trading system, would diminish the world’s ability – collectively and at the national level – to respond to problems affecting people’s lives and opportunities.
I will argue that there is a better path forward: re-imagining the global trading system and the rest of the multilateral economic architecture to help us meet the technological, environmental, social and geopolitical challenges of our time. To succeed, its various components must work in concert – an idea we have come to call ‘coherence’.
In the 1940s, the overall thrust of coherence was that trade, reconstruction financing, and monetary policymaking need to be in harmony with each other, and anchored in institutions and rules across countries, to promote growth, prosperity, and peace.
Today, delivering lasting improvements to people’s lives and livelihoods requires us to solve problems of the global commons.
The notion of coherence across different policy areas would have made sense to Per Jacobsson. His convictions about sound money, and its importance for durable growth and recovery, were shaped by his own experiences. As a young man he saw the collapse of global economic integration amid the First World War. From his position at the League of Nations in the 1920s, he witnessed the failed attempts by leading economies to establish effective international coordination on global finance and trade – a memory that echoes uncomfortably today.
We know what happened when the downturn came at the end of the decade. Vicious circles emerged: of falling output, deflation, banking and financial crises, trade protectionism and retaliation, and exchange rate chaos. Countries retreated into increasingly isolated economic blocs.
The experience of those years was seared into the consciousness of the officials who gathered in Bretton Woods in July 1944. US Treasury Secretary Henry Morgenthau opened the conference by looking back at what he called “the great economic tragedy of our time.” I quote “We saw currency disorders develop and spread from land to land, destroying the basis for international trade and international investment and even international faith. In their wake, we saw unemployment and wretchedness — idle tools, wasted wealth. We saw their victims fall prey, in places, to demagogues and dictators. We saw bewilderment and bitterness become the breeders of fascism and, finally, of war.”
What Bretton Woods delivered
The genius of Bretton Woods was that it turned the vicious circles of the 1930s into virtuous ones, by recognizing that macro-financial stability, reconstruction and development, and trade went hand-in-hand.
Instead of beggar-thy-neighbor policies, countries would treat trade, monetary issues, and even domestic macro-economic policies as matters of common interest.
Instead of excessively rigid or chaotically fluctuating currencies, there would be orderly, rules-based management of exchange rates and balance of payments problems.
Instead of underinvestment, there would be long-term financing for reconstruction and expanding productive capacity.
Instead of quantitative restrictions, prohibitive tariffs, and bilateral clearing, there would be a coordinated lowering of trade barriers, and freedom to undertake international payments and current account transactions.
The idea of coherence across policy fields, with trade as a unifying theme, was baked into the system from day one. Promoting the “balanced growth of international trade” is written into the founding mandates of both the IMF and the World Bank – not as an end in itself, but as a means to higher employment, productivity, and incomes.
The trade leg of the stool, alongside the Bank and the IMF, was supposed to be the International Trade Organization, but it ran aground in the US Congress. A parallel negotiating process in 1947 produced the General Agreement on Tariffs and Trade, which was nominally temporary and did not require Congressional ratification. Successive rounds of GATT negotiations substantially reduced barriers to trade. The growing number of “contracting parties” used the GATT to resolve and avoid trade disputes. By the 1960s, global trade was growing faster than output.
The decades that followed Bretton Woods and the Marshall Plan delivered a breathtaking recovery from the devastation of the Second World War.
Strong growth in the 1950s and 1960s saw per capita incomes in Western Europe and Japan begin to converge with those in the United States.
Major European currencies achieved full convertibility in 1958, when Per Jacobsson was leading the IMF.
These gains, however, were largely confined to industrialized countries.
Most newly independent developing countries continued to lose ground in relative terms, as they struggled with declining terms of trade for their commodities.
But a handful of poor economies in East Asia started trying to use increasingly open external markets to pursue export-led development.
Discordance and reinvention: the 1970s and 1980s
Coherence gave way to discordance in the 1970s, with the oil shocks, stagflation, the advent of floating exchange rates, and a wave of emerging market debt crises.
By the mid-1980s, the success of the so-called Asian tigers had become a compelling example, inspiring many developing country governments to pivot from inward-oriented to export-oriented development strategies.
At the international level, growing frustration with ad hoc protectionism and “à la carte” approaches to GATT strictures created demand for more rules-based trade cooperation.
The Uruguay Round negotiations from 1986 to 1994 broadened the reach of multilateral trade rules to cover services and intellectual property, filled longstanding gaps with respect to agriculture and textiles, and unwound much of the protectionism that had emerged in the preceding years.
The nominally provisional GATT was transformed into the World Trade Organization, with a binding dispute resolution mechanism that enhanced the predictability offered by its expanded rulebook.
The preamble to the Marrakesh Agreement establishing the WTO opened up new vistas for the organization, defining its purpose as using trade not just to raise living standards and create jobs but to advance sustainable development – thus introducing environmental concerns that were absent in the 1940s.
1990 to 2020: A “golden period of economic development”, but clouds on the horizon
The Uruguay Round and the end of the Cold War would mark a second era of coherence and virtuous circles across the trading system, the World Bank, and the IMF. And this time, the benefits were spread much more widely across countries and people.
The WTO became an anchor for outward-oriented economic reforms in many emerging markets and developing economies.
Increasingly open and predictable trade became a stronger driver of development, productivity, specialization and scale.
Better macro-financial policies bolstered growth – and trade performance – in many emerging markets and developing countries. So did improved human capital and physical infrastructure.
Trade and modern supply chains became powerful sources of disinflationary pressures.
Market-oriented reforms in China, Eastern Europe, India and other developing economies brought them into the increasingly global division of labor. Trade boomed, incomes rose, and poverty plummeted.
Between 1995 and 2022, as low- and middle-income economies nearly doubled their share in global exports from 16 to 32%, the share of their populations subsisting on less than US$2.15 per day fell from 40% to under 11%. Over 1.5 billion people were lifted out of extreme poverty.
Since 1995, per capita incomes in low- and middle-income countries have nearly tripled, and global per capita income increased by approximately 65 percent.
For the first time since the industrial revolution two centuries earlier, per capita incomes in rich and poor countries began to converge.
Gains for poor countries did not come at the expense of rich ones. Examining the United States since 1950, researchers at the Peterson Institute for International Economics (PIIE) have shown that international trade boosted the economy by the equivalent of $2.6 trillion in 2022, or about 10% of GDP. The gains from trade would be even larger for small, open advanced economies.
In a Foreign Affairs piece this year, Dev Patel, Justin Sandefur, and Arvind Subramanian called the years between 1990 and the start of COVID-19 pandemic in 2020, I quote, “history’s most golden period of economic development”. They argue that the rapid increase in trading opportunities was “perhaps the most important enabler” of convergence.
Research from our new World Trade Report backs them up: the pace of income convergence of low- and middle-income economies is strikingly correlated with their participation in global trade, as measured by a size-adjusted ratio of trade to GDP. Our simulations suggest falling trade costs account for as much as one-third of the convergence.
To be clear, the period was not golden for everyone. Developing countries with lower trade participation or greater commodity-dependence – mostly in Africa, Latin America and the Caribbean, and the Middle East – lagged on convergence. And in some rich countries, many people felt left behind, and their frustration started to fuel a political backlash against trade.
Multilateral rule-making on trade began to falter, with the failure of the Doha Round of WTO negotiations.
Nevertheless, in 2008 and 2009, when the world economy faced its worst financial crisis since the 1930s, the system worked.
International markets stayed broadly open. The rules and norms of the multilateral trading system helped governments contain protectionist pressures.
Alongside fiscal and monetary support, trade was a powerful shock absorber. Crisis-hit countries could rely on predictable market access elsewhere to absorb their excess supply, preventing growth and development from getting derailed.
The WTO, the World Bank, and the IMF also worked together productively on the macro-micro policy nexus.
For instance, when trade finance dried up during the credit crunch, despite being extremely low-risk, the three institutions joined hands to encourage G20 members and international financial institutions to step in with a $250 billion support package.
Since the financial crisis, the multilateral trading system, with the WTO at its core, has continued to deliver economic benefits, despite rising geopolitical tensions and tariffs between the US and China, the disabling of the Appellate Body, and the failure to reach agreements in long-running negotiations such as those on agriculture. Global trade kept reaching new highs through the 2010s, and over 75% of global goods trade continued – and continues today – to operate on core WTO tariff terms.
When COVID-19 hit in 2020, the norms and rules of the multilateral trading system mostly did their job again. Trust in trade was damaged by initial missteps, as governments enacted export restrictions on medical supplies and vaccines. But governments generally refrained from widespread protectionism, allowing food and other essentials to flow across borders to where they were needed. Goods trade rebounded strongly from the lockdowns and was soon setting new records. Cross-border supply chains churned out products needed to fight the pandemic, from face masks to vaccines. Trade in digitally-delivered services boomed, propelled by the same technologies that allowed so many of us to work from home.
Goods and especially services trade are now well above pre-COVID levels. Last year, global trade was worth a near-record $30.5 trillion, in a $105-trillion world economy.
Re-imagining the Multilateral Trading System with coherence
As we saw at the outset, however, these successes did not forestall the challenges we now face in global trade. While trade has been largely resilient, signs of fragmentation are now visible.
So it’s not difficult to imagine a return of vicious circles – trade restrictions, efficiency losses, slower growth, higher prices, costs imposed by extreme weather and food insecurity, and public frustration and anger.
Allowing the vicious circles to take hold and the world to fragment into isolated trading blocs would be costly. The WTO has estimated longer term global GDP losses in the order of 5% were the world to fragment into two like-minded trading blocs. IMF estimates are in the order 7%. We cannot afford this!
And that is why we need to re-imagine the multilateral trading system to solve modern challenges and address modern vulnerabilities.
This means re-imagining coherence as well. Trade alone was insufficient in 1944, and trade alone is insufficient to build the more secure, sustainable, and inclusive world we want today. The way forward for trade will increasingly be about “WTO and” – trade in tandem with other issues, and policies that support the original vision of coherence and do not misuse trade tools, for coercion, as a weapon, or to undermine competition.
Our unfinished business from 1944 was elegantly illustrated by a recent blog post from IMF chief economist Pierre-Olivier Gourinchas and his team.
They showed that China’s growing and contentious trade surplus, and the US’s widening trade deficit, are the result of domestic macro-economic forces, rather than the product of trade and industrial policies.
“Homegrown surpluses and deficits call for homegrown solutions,” they argued, suggesting demand-boosting measures in China and fiscal consolidation in the US.
As for concerns over industrial policy, they said the right response was to strengthen WTO rules, not to restrict trade.
They cited the WTO’s recent China Trade Policy Review which showed new data of billions of dollars in subsidies going to manufacturing. Urging China to be more transparent about its subsidies.
The blog shows the coherence mandate in action but it also illustrates how even today, the global trading system is paying a price for shortcomings of macro-economic policy.
As Sylvia Ostry, one of my predecessors at this podium, said in 1987, “Trade policy is no substitute for macro policy.”
Let’s now turn to the new trade agenda, and look at three areas where future prospects for people and the planet require trade to be re-imagined, and complemented by other policy levers pulling in the same direction.
First, the environmental agenda, above all climate change and getting to net zero by mid-century.
Trade is indispensable to deploy low-carbon technologies globally. Trade lets countries share the burden of developing new green tech. Scale economies and competitive pressures associated with trade help drive down unit costs, making it possible for renewables to undercut fossil fuel energy.
Trade also allows us to leverage ‘green comparative advantage’, a concept that our chief economist, Ralph Ossa, has done much to advance. The idea is straightforward: just as individuals and countries can reap economic gains by specializing in what they are relatively good at, the world can reap environmental gains if countries specialize in what they are relatively green at.
If countries with abundant clean energy can produce more energy-intensive goods and services, while importing energy-light products from places where clean energy is scarce, and vice versa, global emissions fall much more than they would have absent that trade. And in fact research from the University of Zurich suggests that as much as one-third of global emissions reductions could come from this kind of specialization linked to green comparative advantage.
As Ricardo Hausmann at Harvard has observed, fossil fuels are cheap to transport, but wind and solar energy are not. This makes parts of Africa, Central Asia, and Latin America with high green energy potential attractive destinations for investment in energy-intensive industries, including the production of green hydrogen.
Global cooperation on internalizing carbon costs would incentivize greener sourcing everywhere. Nevertheless, we are already seeing moves in the right direction as in Kenya, which has attracted a billion-dollar investment to build a geothermal-powered low-carbon data center.
Parenthetically, a similar dynamic exists for water, provided it is valued correctly. A recent report of the Global Commission on the Economics of Water, which I co-chair, shows that with trade one can also promote the notion of a hydrological comparative advantage. Trade can help mitigate water scarcity by allowing countries with abundant hydrological resources to specialize in producing water-intensive products for export to water-scarce nations. Such virtual water trade offers agricultural export opportunities, for example, to those regions including countries in Africa with under-utilized ground water resources and land.
But just as environmental policy coordination could accelerate climate action, policy fragmentation could weaken it. There is a genuine risk that trade frictions associated with carbon pricing, green subsidies, and other climate policies will escalate into trade restrictions and retaliation, harming emissions reduction as well as trade.
We should seek to pre-empt such frictions and disputes by establishing shared frameworks for trade and climate policy. The goal would be to maximize emissions reduction and green innovation, while minimizing negative spillovers, trade tensions, and wasted public resources on subsidy races that most countries may not even afford to participate in.
To this end, the WTO Secretariat is coordinating a carbon pricing task force comprised of the IMF, World Bank, OECD, UNCTAD, and UNFCCC, where we are working to develop shared carbon metrics and ultimately a global carbon pricing framework against which we can benchmark national policies to aid interoperability of approaches. We have also joined hands with the IMF, the OECD, and the World Bank to explore approaches to enhance greater transparency with respect to subsidies. And we are working with the steel industry to help them promote interoperability in decarbonization standards, reducing transaction costs and facilitating trade and investment in green steel.
Reforming the over $1.2 trillion in direct global annual fossil fuel subsidies, the $630 billion in trade-distorting agricultural support, and the $22 billion in harmful fisheries subsidies (which the WTO Fisheries Subsidies Agreement is delivering) should be a no-brainer. Some of the resources freed up could be repurposed to support green innovation and a just transition for poor countries.
The second set of opportunities for the Multilateral Trading System deals with diversifying and decentralizing supply chains – and doing so in a manner that brings in countries and communities that remain on the margins of the global division of labor.
More diversified global production networks would enhance supply security in an increasingly shock-prone world, while extending the benefits of trade to places and people that have not shared adequately in them. Greater diversification would also help lower the geopolitical temperature around supply chain relationships, by making them harder for any single country to weaponize.
As the pandemic and the war in Ukraine made abundantly clear, overconcentration makes supply chains vulnerable in a crisis.
The advent of COVID-19, concentrated minds on the fact that 80% of world vaccine exports came from only ten countries. This meant export restrictions in a few of them severely disrupted global access to vaccines – especially to Africa, which relied on imports for 99% of its jabs.
Decentralizing value chains and building up pharmaceutical production capacity in Africa and other developing country regions for instance would make the global supply base more resilient in the event of future pandemics, whilst more closely integrating these regions in to world trade, and making them part of a more prosperous and healthy world.
Critical minerals is another sector where there are major opportunities to mitigate concerns about overconcentration in mining and especially processing, while stimulating growth in developing countries.
Exports of minerals critical for the low-carbon transition, like lithium, cobalt, nickel, and rare earths, have grown rapidly to reach USD 320 billion in value in 2022, and are set to increase much more in the years ahead. Africa, for example, represents 40% of estimated global reserves of cobalt, manganese, and platinum; and 12% of world exports of critical minerals, but only 3.8% of exports of processed minerals.
By investing in processing these minerals within the regions including in Central Asia and Latin America where they are found, we can promote value addition and job creation while removing supply bottlenecks that currently threaten to hold back the low-carbon transition.
Furthermore, to the extent that this process is powered by green hydrogen and other kinds of clean energy, it would harness the green comparative advantage I mentioned earlier and thereby help the developing regions increase their share in world trade.
It would be green growth and green trade – the ‘re-globalization’ we want.
Finally, there are areas where cross-border commerce is flourishing, but where new rules are necessary to foster predictability and lower barriers to entry for smaller businesses and developing economies.
The fastest growing segment of international trade is in services delivered across borders via computer networks. Trade in digitally-delivered services – everything from streaming video to remote consulting – has quadrupled since 2005, reaching $4.25 trillion in value last year. These services have become an increasingly important driver of growth and job creation.
The commercialization of artificial intelligence promises to further accelerate digital trade. A forthcoming WTO report describes how AI could reduce trade and transaction costs, improve supply chain logistics, and shift countries’ comparative advantages.
I always say the future of trade is digital, but the future of protectionism could be as well. Imports of digital services could become as contentious as manufactured imports have, or more so – inviting digital barriers that are even simpler to put in place than their counterparts for trade in physical goods.
Putting in place some basic rules for digital trade would reduce the risks of such reversals. The 90-odd members participating in plurilateral e-commerce negotiations at the WTO are now looking to conclude a first phase agreement on a series of practical measures to facilitate digital trade, from common rules for e-signatures and payments, to paperless trading, and consumer protection. Tougher issues like cross-border data flows – a critical element in AI – will be dealt with in a second phase of negotiations.
Delivering on this agenda for the future will involve strengthening all of the WTO’s functions: monitoring and transparency, negotiations, and dispute settlement.
With respect to our dispute settlement system, we are working to reform it. The reform process has wide buy-in, and talks are advancing, including on issues like appeal review and accessibility to ensure that developing countries can use the system. There are delicate issues here around how national security exceptions will be handled – it is going to take work!
We will need to negotiate and implement new rules in important areas like the environment. Some members are showing the way: New Zealand, Costa Rica, Switzerland, and Iceland recently agreed to liberalize trade in a list of hundreds of environmental goods, and they are trying to get others to join.
We are working on getting an Agreement on Investment Facilitation for Development, negotiated by three-quarters of our membership, into the WTO rulebook. This agreement will help developing economies attract FDI by simplifying investment-related procedures and sweeping away red tape.
We will also need to review existing rules to make them fit for purpose. Instead of members doing an end run around our Agreement on Subsidies and Countervailing Measures to introduce industrial policies, it would be better to update that agreement. It actually dates back to 1994 – seven years before China joined the WTO, [a time when climate concerns were barely on the radar screen, and the conventional wisdom was that state-owned enterprises were a fading relic of a bygone era]. Members could decide to create space for subsidizing the green transition. Shared ground rules would help minimize negative spillovers and related trade tensions, while maximizing efficiency in the use of public resources.
Excellencies, ladies, and gentlemen. Let me now conclude.
As I said at the start, these are tense times for trade. There are political dynamics outside our control. But we can treat the challenges we face as opportunities to re-imagine the global trading system.
We can build global resilience whilst making the system more supportive of inclusive growth and environmental sustainability.
We can make existing trade rules more fit for purpose rather than go around or against them and we can make new rules fit for the time.
We can help developing countries left behind by the recent wave of global economic integration.
We can have interdependence without overdependence.
While nothing is ever easy at the WTO, we are moving in the right direction. We will manage what we can manage. Control what we can control. But we will need your help.
Over the past eight decades, the multilateral economic architecture, including the trading system, has delivered a great deal for the world. We have reinvented it before. We can do so again, for people and planet.
Nelson Mandela once wrote that “after climbing a great hill, one only finds that there are many more hills to climb.” I ask you, let’s climb these hills together.
Thank you.

Share

MIL OSI Economics –

January 25, 2025
MIL-OSI: Eos Energy Achieves Second Set of Performance Milestones Related to Cerberus Strategic Investment

Source: GlobeNewswire (MIL-OSI)

TURTLE CREEK, Pa., Oct. 31, 2024 (GLOBE NEWSWIRE) — Eos Energy Enterprises, Inc. (NASDAQ: EOSE) (“Eos” or the “Company”), a leading provider of safe, scalable, efficient, and sustainable zinc-based long duration energy storage systems, today announced the successful achievement of all four of the second performance milestones previously agreed upon between Eos and an affiliate of Cerberus Capital Management LP (“Cerberus”) as part of Cerberus’s strategic investment in the Company. Achieving these performance milestones enables the Company to draw an additional $65 million from the Delayed Draw Term Loan.

About Eos Energy Enterprises

Eos Energy Enterprises, Inc. is accelerating the shift to clean energy with positively ingenious solutions that transform how the world stores power. Our breakthrough Znyth™ aqueous zinc battery was designed to overcome the limitations of conventional lithium-ion technology. It is safe, scalable, efficient, sustainable, manufactured in the U.S., and the core of our innovative systems that today provides utility, industrial, and commercial customers with a proven, reliable energy storage alternative for 3 to 12-hour applications. Eos was founded in 2008 and is headquartered in Edison, New Jersey. For more information about Eos (NASDAQ: EOSE), visit eose.com.

Contacts
Investors:     ir@eose.com
Media:         media@eose.com

Forward Looking Statements

Except for the historical information contained herein, the matters set forth in this press release are forward-looking statements within the meaning of the “safe harbor” provisions of the Private Securities Litigation Reform Act of 1995. Forward-looking statements include, but are not limited to, statements regarding our expected revenue, contribution margins, orders backlog and opportunity pipeline for the fiscal year ended December 31, 2024, our path to profitability and strategic outlook, the tax credits available to our customers or to Eos pursuant to the Inflation Reduction Act of 2022, the delayed draw term loan, milestones thereunder and the anticipated use of proceeds therefrom, statements regarding our ability to secure final approval of a loan from the Department of Energy LPO, or our anticipated use of proceeds from any loan facility provided by the US Department of Energy, statements that refer to outlook, projections, forecasts or other characterizations of future events or circumstances, including any underlying assumptions. The words “anticipate,” “believe,” “continue,” “could,” “estimate,” “expect,” “intends,” “may,” “might,” “plan,” “possible,” “potential,” “predict,” “project,” “should,” “would” and similar expressions may identify forward-looking statements, but the absence of these words does not mean that a statement is not forward-looking. Forward-looking statements are based on our management’s beliefs, as well as assumptions made by, and information currently available to, them. Because such statements are based on expectations as to future financial and operating results and are not statements of fact, actual results may differ materially from those projected.

Factors which may cause actual results to differ materially from current expectations include, but are not limited to: changes adversely affecting the business in which we are engaged; our ability to forecast trends accurately; our ability to generate cash, service indebtedness and incur additional indebtedness; our ability to achieve the operational milestones on the delayed draw term loan; our ability to raise financing in the future, including the discretionary revolving facility from Cerberus; risks associated with the credit agreement with Cerberus, including risks of default, dilution of outstanding Common Stock, consequences for failure to meet milestones and contractual lockup of shares; our customers’ ability to secure project financing; the amount of final tax credits available to our customers or to Eos pursuant to the Inflation Reduction Act, uncertainties around our ability to meet the applicable conditions precedent and secure final approval of a loan, in a timely manner or at all from the Department of Energy, Loan Programs Office, or the timing of funding and the final size of any loan that is approved; the possibility of a government shutdown while we work to meet the applicable conditions precedent and finalize loan documents with the U.S. Department of Energy Loan Programs Office or while we await notice of a decision regarding the issuance of a loan from the Department Energy Loan Programs Office; our ability to continue to develop efficient manufacturing processes to scale and to forecast related costs and efficiencies accurately; fluctuations in our revenue and operating results; competition from existing or new competitors; our ability to convert firm order backlog and pipeline to revenue; risks associated with security breaches in our information technology systems; risks related to legal proceedings or claims; risks associated with evolving energy policies in the United States and other countries and the potential costs of regulatory compliance; risks associated with changes to the U.S. trade environment; risks resulting from the impact of global pandemics, including the novel coronavirus, Covid-19; our ability to maintain the listing of our shares of common stock on NASDAQ; our ability to grow our business and manage growth profitably, maintain relationships with customers and suppliers and retain our management and key employees; risks related to the adverse changes in general economic conditions, including inflationary pressures and increased interest rates; risk from supply chain disruptions and other impacts of geopolitical conflict; changes in applicable laws or regulations; the possibility that Eos may be adversely affected by other economic, business, and/or competitive factors; other factors beyond our control; risks related to adverse changes in general economic conditions; and other risks and uncertainties.

The forward-looking statements contained in this press release are also subject to additional risks, uncertainties, and factors, including those more fully described in the Company’s most recent filings with the Securities and Exchange Commission, including the Company’s most recent Annual Report on Form 10-K and subsequent reports on Forms 10-Q and 8-K. Further information on potential risks that could affect actual results will be included in the subsequent periodic and current reports and other filings that the Company makes with the Securities and Exchange Commission from time to time. Moreover, the Company operates in a very competitive and rapidly changing environment, and new risks and uncertainties may emerge that could have an impact on the forward-looking statements contained in this press release.

Forward-looking statements speak only as of the date they are made. Readers are cautioned not to put undue reliance on forward-looking statements, and, except as required by law, the Company assumes no obligation and does not intend to update or revise these forward-looking statements, whether as a result of new information, future events, or otherwise.

The MIL Network –

January 25, 2025

MIL-OSI: Asure Announces Third Quarter 2024 Results

Source: GlobeNewswire (MIL-OSI)

Reports Third Quarter Revenues of $29.3 Million

Recurring Revenues Grew 20% Versus Prior Year Third Quarter

AUSTIN, Texas, Oct. 31, 2024 (GLOBE NEWSWIRE) — Asure Software, Inc. (“we”, “us”, “our”, “Asure” or the “Company”) (Nasdaq: ASUR), a leading provider of cloud-based Human Capital Management (“HCM”) software solutions, today reported results for the third quarter ended September 30, 2024.

Third Quarter 2024 Financial Highlights

Revenue of $29.3 million, nearly unchanged versus the same period of the prior year
Revenue (excluding ERTC revenue) of $29.2 million, up 20% from $24.4 million versus the same period of the prior year
Recurring revenue of $28.6 million, up 20% year over year. Recurring revenue was 98% of total revenue versus 81% the same period of the prior year
Net loss of $3.9 million versus a net loss of $2.2 million during the same period of the prior year
EBITDA⁽¹⁾ of $2.2 million versus $3.0 million during the same period of the prior year
Adjusted EBITDA⁽¹⁾ of $5.4 million versus $6.2 million during the same period of the prior year
Gross profit of $19.7 million versus $21.3 million during the same period of the prior year
Non-GAAP gross profit⁽¹⁾ of $21.4 million (Non-GAAP gross margin⁽¹⁾ of 73%) versus $22.4 million (and 76% during the same period of the prior year)

Nine Months 2024 Financial Highlights

Revenue of $89.0 million down 4% versus the first nine months of prior year
Revenue (excluding ERTC revenue) of $87.4 million up 15% from $75.7 million in the first nine months of prior year
Recurring revenue (excluding ERTC revenue) of $86.0 million up 16% from $74.4 million in the first nine months of prior year
Net loss of $8.6 million versus a net loss of $5.6 million the first nine months of prior year
EBITDA⁽¹⁾ of $8.0 million versus $13.2 million the first nine months of prior year
Adjusted EBITDA⁽¹⁾ of $16.3 million versus $20.5 million the first nine months of prior year
Gross profit of $61.2 million versus $67.7 million during the first nine months of the prior year
Non-GAAP gross profit⁽¹⁾ of $65.6 million (Non-GAAP gross margin⁽¹⁾ of 74%) versus $71.5 million (and 77% during the first nine months of the prior year)

_______________
(1)This financial measure is not calculated in accordance with GAAP and is defined on page 4 of this press release. A reconciliation of this non-GAAP measure to the most applicable GAAP measure begins on page 11 of this release.

Recent Business Highlights

Payroll Tax Management Expansion: Asure’s Payroll Tax Management product gained significant momentum, going live with additional Workday and SAP clients during the third quarter. Key sales wins include one of America’s largest grocery chains and a nationally known HCM system integrator who assists large enterprises with Workday, SAP, and Oracle HCM implementations. These enterprise bookings have grown our backlog and still represent additional product and professional services opportunities.
HCM Architectural Milestone: Employee self-service capabilities have been decoupled from disparate payroll platforms and modularized as a single API-based service. This enhancement improves scalability and stability of the end-to-end HCM suite and further consolidates our technical footprint to a more flexible service-oriented architecture.
Entering Beta of New AI Agent: More than a chatbot, this new Generative-AI Agent handles inquiries related to payroll and payroll taxes takes secure action on behalf of the user. Through dynamic, interactive sessions, the AI Agent will answer questions and take actions on HR requests including time off requests, demographic changes, or changes to W-4 allowances.
Leadership Recognition: Asure Chairman and CEO, Pat Goepel, was named Austin Business Journal’s Best CEO of a Public Company for 2024, recognizing his leadership and commitment to Asure’s growth and success.
New financial services product to launch November 2024: Asure is introducing AsurePay™, an innovative financial solution offering working Americans a comprehensive online banking alternative. AsurePay™ combines features such as debit card access, fee-free ATM withdrawals, and paycheck advances through a unique interest-bearing banking solution, designed to improve employee engagement, while also improving overall employer efficiency. This solution is easily accessible through an intuitive mobile app.

Management Commentary

Asure Chairman and CEO, Pat Goepel, stated, “Our third quarter performance reflects strong, continued growth, with recurring revenue up 20% year-over-year. We’ve made great strides in transitioning to a more valuable revenue model, with 98% of our revenues now recurring, compared to 81% in the same quarter last year. Additionally, new bookings were up 141% year-over-year. Our backlog has grown significantly — over 35% from Q2 2024 and over 250% from Q3 2023. While large enterprise tax product deals have contributed to our success, their pace of implementation can vary. That said, we remain confident in our ability to maintain this positive trajectory.”

Goepel continued, “We’re seeing strong demand for our Payroll Tax Management product, we’re introducing new solutions, upgrading our technology, and making strategic acquisitions. Earlier in the year, we faced the challenge of replacing ERTC revenue, but those headwinds have now dissipated as we close out 2024 and this change in the composition of our revenues offers us strong momentum going into 2025. We are optimistic about the opportunities ahead for both the remainder of this year and into next year.”

Fourth Quarter 2024 and Full Year 2025 Revenue Guidance Ranges

The Company is providing the following guidance for the fourth quarter 2024 based on the Company’s year-to-date results and recent business trends. Management is initiating full year 2025 guidance to a range of $134M-$138M which does not include revenue from potential future acquisitions.

Guidance for 2024

Guidance Range		Q4-2024		FY-2024
Revenue	$	30M – 32M	$	119M -121M
Adjusted EBITDA⁽¹⁾	$	6M -7M		18% -19%

Guidance for 2025

Guidance Range		FY-2025
Revenue	$	134M – 138M
Adjusted EBITDA⁽¹⁾		23% – 24%

Management uses GAAP, non-GAAP and adjusted measures when planning, monitoring, and evaluating the Company’s performance. The primary purpose of using non-GAAP and adjusted measures is to provide supplemental information that may prove useful to investors and to enable investors to evaluate the Company’s results in the same way that management does.

Management believes that supplementing GAAP disclosures with non-GAAP and adjusted disclosures provides investors with a more complete view of the Company’s operational performance and allows for meaningful period-to-period comparisons and analysis of trends in the Company’s business. Further, to the extent that other companies use similar methods in calculating adjusted financial measures, the provision of supplemental non-GAAP and adjusted information can allow for a comparison of the Company’s relative performance against other companies that also report non-GAAP and adjusted operating results.

Management has not provided a reconciliation of guidance of GAAP to non-GAAP or adjusted disclosures because management is unable to predict the nature and materiality of non-recurring expenses without unreasonable effort.

Management’s projections are based on management’s current beliefs and assumptions about the Company’s business, and the industry and markets in which it operates; there are known and unknown risks and uncertainties associated with these projections. There can be no assurance that our actual results will not differ from the guidance set forth above. The Company assumes no obligation to update publicly any forward-looking statements, including its 2024 and 2025 earnings guidance, whether as a result of new information, future events or otherwise. Please refer to the “Use of Forward-Looking Statements” disclosures on page 6 of this press release as well as the risk factors in our quarterly and annual reports on file with the Securities and Exchange Commission for more information about risk that affect our business and industry.

Conference Call Details

Asure management will host a conference call on Thursday, October 31, 2024, at 3:30 pm Central (4:30 pm Eastern). Asure Chairman and CEO Pat Goepel and CFO John Pence will participate in the conference call followed by a question-and-answer session. The conference call will be broadcast live and available for replay via the investor relations section of the Company’s website. Analysts may participate on the conference call by dialing 877-407-9219 or 201-689-8852.

About Asure Software, Inc.

Asure Software (Nasdaq: ASUR) is a leading provider of Human Capital Management (“HCM”) software solutions. We help small and mid-sized companies grow by assisting them in building better teams with skills to stay compliant with ever-changing federal, state, and local tax jurisdictions and labor laws, and better allocate cash so they can spend their financial capital on growing their business rather than back-office overhead expenses. Asure’s Human Capital Management suite, named AsureHCM®, includes cloud-based Payroll, Tax Services, and Time & Attendance software and Asure Marketplace™ as well as human resources (“HR”) services ranging from HR projects to completely outsourcing payroll and HR staff. We also offer these products and services through our network of reseller partners. Visit us at asuresoftware.com.

Non-GAAP and Adjusted Financial Measures

This press release includes information about non-GAAP gross profit, non-GAAP sales and marketing expense, non-GAAP general and administrative expense, non-GAAP research and development expense, EBITDA, EBITDA margin, adjusted EBITDA, and adjusted EBITDA margin. These non-GAAP and adjusted financial measures are measurements of financial performance that are not prepared in accordance with U.S. generally accepted accounting principles and computational methods may differ from those used by other companies. Non-GAAP and adjusted financial measures are not meant to be considered in isolation or as a substitute for comparable GAAP measures and should be read only in conjunction with the Company’s Condensed Consolidated Financial Statements prepared in accordance with GAAP. Non-GAAP and adjusted financial measures are reconciled to GAAP in the tables set forth in this release and are subject to reclassifications to conform to current period presentations.

Non-GAAP gross profit differs from gross profit in that it excludes amortization, share-based compensation, and one-time items.

Non-GAAP sales and marketing expense differs from sales and marketing expense in that it excludes share-based compensation and one-time items.

Non-GAAP general and administrative expense differs from general and administrative expense in that it excludes share-based compensation and one-time items.

Non-GAAP research and development expense differs from research and development expense in that it excludes share-based compensation and one-time items.

EBITDA differs from net income (loss) in that it excludes items such as interest, income taxes, depreciation, and amortization. Asure is unable to predict with reasonable certainty the ultimate outcome of these exclusions without unreasonable effort.

Adjusted EBITDA differs from EBITDA in that it excludes share-based compensation, other income (expense), net and one-time expenses. Asure is unable to predict with reasonable certainty the ultimate outcome of these exclusions without unreasonable effort.

All adjusted and non-GAAP measures presented as “margin” are computed by dividing the applicable adjusted financial measure by total revenue.

Specifically, as applicable to the respective financial measure, management is adjusting for the following items when calculating non-GAAP and adjusted financial measures as applicable for the periods presented. No additional adjustments have been made for potential income tax effects of the adjustments based on the Company’s current and anticipated de minimis effective federal tax rate, resulting from the Company’s continued losses for federal tax purposes and its tax net operating loss balances.

Share-Based Compensation Expenses. The Company’s compensation strategy includes the use of share-based compensation to attract and retain employees and executives. It is principally aimed at aligning their interests with those of our stockholders and at long-term employee retention, rather than motivating or rewarding operational performance for any particular period. Thus, share-based compensation expense varies for reasons that are generally unrelated to operational decisions and performance in any particular period.

Depreciation. The Company excludes depreciation of fixed assets. Also included in the expense is the depreciation of capitalized software costs.

Amortization of Purchased Intangibles. The Company views amortization of acquisition-related intangible assets, such as the amortization of the cost associated with an acquired company’s research and development efforts, trade names, customer lists and customer relationships, and acquired lease intangibles, as items arising from pre-acquisition activities determined at the time of an acquisition. While these intangible assets are continually evaluated for impairment, amortization of the cost of purchased intangibles is a static expense, one that is not typically affected by operations during any particular period.

Interest Expense, Net. The Company excludes accrued interest expense, the amortization of debt discounts and deferred financing costs.

Income Taxes. The Company excludes income taxes, both at the federal and state levels.

One-Time Expenses. The Company’s adjusted financial measures exclude the following costs to normalize comparable reporting periods, as these are generally non-recurring expenses that do not reflect the ongoing operational results. These items are typically not budgeted and are infrequent and unusual in nature.

Settlements, Penalties and Interest. The Company excludes legal settlements, including separation agreements, penalties and interest that are generally one-time in nature and not reflective of the operational results of the business.

Acquisition and Transaction Related Costs. The Company excludes these expenses as they are transaction costs and expenses that are generally one-time in nature and not reflective of the underlying operational results of our business. Examples of these types of expenses include legal, accounting, regulatory, other consulting services, severance and other employee costs.

Other non-recurring Expenses. The Company excludes these as they are generally non-recurring items that are not reflective of the underlying operational results of the business and are generally not anticipated to recur. Some examples of these types of expenses, historically, have included write-offs or impairments of assets, demolition of office space and cybersecurity consultants.

Other (Expense) Income, Net. The Company’s adjusted financial measures exclude Other (Expense) Income, Net because it includes items that are not reflective of the underlying operational results of the business, such as loan forgiveness, adjustments to contingent liabilities and credits earned as part of the CARES Act, passed by Congress in the wake of the coronavirus pandemic.

Use of Forward-Looking Statements

This press release contains certain statements made by management that may constitute “forward-looking” statements within the meaning of the safe harbor provisions of the U.S. Private Securities Litigation Reform Act of 1995. These forward-looking statements about our financial results may include expected or projected U.S GAAP and other operating and non-operating results. The words “believe,” “may,” “will,” “estimate,” “projects,” “anticipate,” “intend,” “expect,” “should,” “plan,” and similar expressions are intended to identify forward-looking statements. Examples of “forward-looking statements” include statements we make regarding our operating performance, future results of operations and financial position, revenue growth, earnings or other projections. We have based these forward-looking statements largely on our current expectations and projections about future events and trends that we believe may affect our financial condition, results of operations, business strategy, short-term and long-term business operations and objectives, and financial needs. The achievement or success of the matters covered by such forward-looking statements involves risks, uncertainties and assumptions, over many of which we have no control. If any such risks or uncertainties materialize or if any of the assumptions prove incorrect, our results could differ materially from the results expressed or implied by the forward-looking statements we make.

The risks and uncertainties referred to above include—but are not limited to—the expiration of major revenue streams such as Employee Retention Tax Credits (“ERTC”) and the impact of the Internal Revenue Service recent measures regarding ERTC claims; risks associated with breaches of the Company’s security measures; risks associated with the Company’s rate of growth and anticipated revenue run rate, including impact of the current economic environment; the Company’s ability to convert deferred revenue and unbilled deferred revenue into revenue and cash flow, and ability to maintain continued growth of deferred revenue and unbilled deferred revenue; privacy concerns and laws and other regulations may limit the effectiveness of our applications; the financial and other impact of any previous and future acquisitions; the Company’s ability to continue to release, gain customer acceptance of and provide support for new and improved versions of the Company’s services; successful customer deployment and utilization of the Company’s existing and future services; interruptions to supply chains and extended shut down of businesses; issues in the use of artificial intelligence in our HCM products and services; political unrest, including the current conflict between Russia and Ukraine and the ongoing conflict involving Israel in the Middle East; reductions in employment and an increase in business failures, specifically among our clients; possible fluctuations in the Company’s financial and operating results; regulatory pressures on economic relief enacted as a result of the COVID-19 pandemic that change or cause different interpretations with respect to eligibility for such programs; domestic and international regulatory developments, including changes to or applicability to our business of privacy and data securities laws, money transmitter laws and anti-money laundering laws; technological developments; the nature of the Company’s business model; interest rates; competition; various financial aspects of the Company’s subscription model; impairment of intangible assets; interruptions or delays in the Company’s services or the Company’s Web hosting; access to additional capital; the Company’s ability to hire, retain and motivate employees and manage the Company’s growth; litigation and any related claims, negotiations and settlements, including with respect to intellectual property matters or industry-specific regulations; volatility and weakness in bank and capital markets; factors affecting the Company’s deferred tax assets and ability to value and utilize them; volatility and low trading volume of our common stock; collection of receivables; and general developments in the economy, financial markets, credit markets and the impact of current and future accounting pronouncements and other financial reporting standards. Please review the Company’s risk factors in its annual report on Form 10-K filed with the Securities and Exchange Commission (the “SEC”) on February 26, 2024, and its quarterly reports on Form 10-Q filed with the SEC on August 1, 2024, and October 31, 2024.

The forward-looking statements, including the financial guidance 2024 and 2025 outlooks, contained in this press release represent the judgment of the Company as of the date of this press release, and the Company expressly disclaims any intent, obligation or undertaking to release publicly any updates or revisions to any forward-looking statements to reflect any change in the Company’s expectations with regard to these forward looking statements or any change in events, conditions or circumstances on which any such statements are based.

ASURE SOFTWARE, INC. CONDENSED CONSOLIDATED BALANCE SHEETS (in thousands, except per share amounts) (Unaudited)

	September 30, 2024			December 31, 2023

ASSETS
Current assets:
Cash and cash equivalents	$	11,248		$	30,317
Accounts receivable, net of allowance for credit losses of $6,150 and $4,787 at September 30, 2024 and December 31, 2023, respectively		17,233			14,202
Inventory		233			155
Prepaid expenses and other current assets		4,586			3,471
Total current assets before funds held for clients		33,300			48,145
Funds held for clients		193,589			219,075
Total current assets		226,889			267,220
Property and equipment, net		18,490			14,517
Goodwill		94,724			86,011
Intangible assets, net		73,429			62,082
Operating lease assets, net		4,401			4,991
Other assets, net		10,176			9,047
Total assets	$	428,109		$	443,868
LIABILITIES AND STOCKHOLDERS’ EQUITY
Current liabilities:
Current portion of notes payable	$	—		$	27
Accounts payable		1,317			2,570
Accrued compensation and benefits		4,277			6,519
Operating lease liabilities, current		1,600			1,490
Other accrued liabilities		8,287			3,862
Deferred revenue		3,029			6,853
Total current liabilities before client fund obligations		18,510			21,321
Client fund obligations		193,951			220,019
Total current liabilities		212,461			241,340
Long-term liabilities:
Deferred revenue		2,276			16
Deferred tax liability		2,116			1,728
Notes payable, net of current portion		7,506			4,282
Operating lease liabilities, noncurrent		3,832			4,638
Other liabilities		765			209
Total long-term liabilities		16,495			10,873
Total liabilities		228,956			252,213
Stockholders’ equity:
Preferred stock, $0.01 par value; 1,500 shares authorized; none issued or outstanding		—			—
Common stock, $0.01 par value; 44,000 shares authorized; 26,540 and 25,382 shares issued, 26,540 and 24,998 shares outstanding at September 30, 2024 and December 31, 2023, respectively		265			254
Treasury stock at cost, zero(1) and 384 shares at September 30, 2024 and December 31, 2023, respectively		—			(5,017	)
Additional paid-in capital		502,920			487,973
Accumulated deficit		(304,022	)		(290,440	)
Accumulated other comprehensive loss		(10	)		(1,115	)
Total stockholders’ equity		199,153			191,655
Total liabilities and stockholders’ equity	$	428,109		$	443,868
(1) The aggregate Treasury stock of prior repurchases of the Company’s own common stock was retired and subsequently issued effective January 1, 2024. See the Condensed Consolidated Statement of Changes in Stockholders’ Equity for the impact of this transaction.

ASURE SOFTWARE, INC. CONDENSED CONSOLIDATED STATEMENTS OF COMPREHENSIVE LOSS (in thousands, except per share amounts) (Unaudited)

	Three Months Ended September 30,						Nine Months Ended September 30,
		2024			2023			2024			2023

Revenue:
Recurring	$	28,626		$	23,833		$	85,950		$	74,749
Professional services, hardware and other		678			5,501			3,050			18,069
Total revenue		29,304			29,334			89,000			92,818
Cost of sales		9,600			8,054			27,821			25,120
Gross profit		19,704			21,280			61,179			67,698
Operating expenses:
Sales and marketing		6,680			6,597			21,371			22,312
General and administrative		10,378			9,294			30,559			29,586
Research and development		1,973			1,803			5,704			5,107
Amortization of intangible assets		4,295			3,333			11,790			9,929
Total operating expenses		23,326			21,027			69,424			66,934
(Loss) income from operations		(3,622	)		253			(8,245	)		764
Interest income		165			437			762			1,015
Interest expense		(274	)		(1,219	)		(662	)		(5,336	)
Loss on extinguishment of debt		—			(1,517	)		—			(1,517	)
Other (expense) income, net		—			(283	)		10			(291	)
Loss from operations before income taxes		(3,731	)		(2,329	)		(8,135	)		(5,365	)
Income tax expense (benefit)		170			(123	)		434			267
Net loss		(3,901	)		(2,206	)		(8,569	)		(5,632	)
Other comprehensive loss:
Unrealized income (loss) on marketable securities		1,340			(201	)		1,105			(213	)
Comprehensive loss	$	(2,561	)	$	(2,407	)	$	(7,464	)	$	(5,845	)

Basic and diluted loss per share
Basic	$	(0.15	)	$	(0.10	)	$	(0.33	)	$	(0.27	)
Diluted	$	(0.15	)	$	(0.10	)	$	(0.33	)	$	(0.27	)

Weighted average basic and diluted shares
Basic		26,429			22,591			25,870			21,204
Diluted		26,429			22,591			25,870			21,204

ASURE SOFTWARE, INC. CONDENSED CONSOLIDATED STATEMENTS OF CASH FLOWS (in thousands) (Unaudited)

	Nine Months Ended September 30,
		2024			2023

Cash flows from operating activities:
Net loss	$	(8,569	)	$	(5,632	)
Adjustments to reconcile loss to net cash (used) in provided by operations:
Depreciation and amortization		16,200			14,243
Amortization of operating lease assets		1,025			1,129
Amortization of debt financing costs and discount		531			548
Non-cash interest expense		—			1,471
Net accretion of discounts on available-for-sale securities		(273	)		(63	)
Provision for expected losses		111			2,004
Provision for deferred income taxes		388			111
Loss on extinguishment of debt		—			1,208
Net realized gains on sales of available-for-sale securities		(1,929	)		(1,645	)
Share-based compensation		4,981			4,170
Loss on disposals of long-term assets		—			132
Change in fair value of contingent purchase consideration		—			175
Changes in operating assets and liabilities:
Accounts receivable		(3,142	)		(5,014	)
Inventory		(78	)		159
Prepaid expenses and other assets		(1,656	)		4,031
Operating lease right-of-use assets		—			473
Accounts payable		(1,253	)		(498	)
Accrued expenses and other long-term obligations		(1,052	)		918
Operating lease liabilities		(1,139	)		(895	)
Deferred revenue		(4,539	)		(5,190	)
Net cash (used) in provided by operating activities		(394	)		11,835
Cash flows from investing activities:
Acquisition of intangible asset		(12,397	)		(697	)
Purchases of property and equipment		(546	)		(1,365	)
Software capitalization costs		(7,677	)		(5,029	)
Purchases of available-for-sale securities		(10,914	)		(21,513	)
Proceeds from sales and maturities of available-for-sale securities		13,325			10,428
Net cash used in investing activities		(18,209	)		(18,176	)
Cash flows from financing activities:
Payments of notes payable		(420	)		(35,627	)
Debt extinguishment costs		—			(468	)
Payments made on amounts due for the acquisition of intangible assets		(658	)		—
Net proceeds from issuance of common stock		902			45,986
Capital raise fees		(47	)		(258	)
Net change in client fund obligations		(26,068	)		(31,033	)
Net cash used in financing activities		(26,291	)		(21,400	)
Net decrease in cash and cash equivalents		(44,894	)		(27,741	)
Cash and cash equivalents, beginning of period		177,622			164,042
Cash and cash equivalents, end of period	$	132,728		$	136,301

ASURE SOFTWARE, INC. CONDENSED CONSOLIDATED STATEMENTS OF CASH FLOWS (continued) (in thousands) (Unaudited)

	Nine Months Ended September 30,
		2024		2023

Reconciliation of cash and cash equivalents to the Condensed Consolidated Balance Sheets
Cash and cash equivalents	$	11,248	$	32,787
Cash and cash equivalents included in funds held for clients		121,480		103,514
Total cash and cash equivalents	$	132,728	$	136,301

Supplemental information:
Cash paid for interest	$	—	$	3,140
Cash paid for income taxes	$	15	$	532

Non-cash investing and financing activities:
Acquisition of intangible assets	$	6,918	$	332
Notes payable issued for acquisitions	$	3,138	$	—
Shares issued for acquisitions	$	9,125	$	2,543

ASURE SOFTWARE, INC. RECONCILIATION OF NON-GAAP AND ADJUSTED FINANCIAL MEASURES (unaudited)

(in thousands)	Q3-24			Q2-24			Q1-24			Q4-23			Q3-23			Q2-23			Q1-23			Q4-22
Revenue⁽¹⁾	$	29,304		$	28,044		$	31,652		$	26,264		$	29,334		$	30,420		$	33,064		$	29,292

Gross Profit to non-GAAP Gross Profit
Gross Profit	$	19,704		$	18,868		$	22,607		$	17,839		$	21,280		$	22,018		$	24,400		$	21,139
Gross Margin		67.2	%		67.3	%		71.4	%		67.9	%		72.5	%		72.4	%		73.8	%		72.2	%

Share-based Compensation		44			43			40			32			28			46			31			34
Depreciation		1,232			1,145			1,110			921			984			1,309			1,009			871
Amortization – intangibles		50			50			50			50			50			50			268			298
One-time expenses
Settlements, penalties & interest		2			3			—			(6	)		8			—			4			3
Acquisition and transaction costs		367			264			39			—			—			—			—			—
Non-GAAP Gross Profit	$	21,399		$	20,373		$	23,846		$	18,836		$	22,350		$	23,423		$	25,712		$	22,345
Non-GAAP Gross Margin		73.0	%		72.6	%		75.3	%		71.7	%		76.2	%		77.0	%		77.8	%		76.3	%

Sales and Marketing Expense to non-GAAP Sales and Marketing Expense
Sales and Marketing Expense	$	6,680		$	6,924		$	7,767		$	6,422		$	6,597		$	8,515		$	7,200		$	6,022

Share-based Compensation		269			237			243			180			210			149			124			93
Depreciation		1			—			1			1			—			—			—			—
One-time expenses
Settlements, penalties & interest		(5	)		5			18			6			30			4			11			—
Acquisition and transaction costs		68			37			11			—			—			—			—			—
Other non-recurring expenses		—			—			—			—			—			180			—			—
Non-GAAP Sales and Marketing Expense	$	6,347		$	6,645		$	7,494		$	6,235		$	6,357		$	8,182		$	7,065		$	5,929

General and Administrative Expense to non-GAAP General and Administrative Expense
General and Administrative Expense	$	10,378		$	10,118		$	10,063		$	9,747		$	9,294		$	10,336		$	9,956		$	9,720

Share-based Compensation		1,187			1,122			1,535			980			936			1,298			1,142			641
Depreciation		264			256			251			225			200			234			210			168
One-time expenses
Settlements, penalties & interest		377			304			98			284			101			432			102			34
Acquisition and transaction costs		371			245			57			51			—			—			—			—
Other non-recurring expenses		253			—			86			53			—			453			—			—
Non-GAAP General and Administrative Expense	$	7,926		$	8,191		$	8,036		$	8,154		$	8,057		$	7,919		$	8,502		$	8,877

Research and Development Expense to non-GAAP Research and Development Expense
Research and Development Expense	$	1,973		$	1,962		$	1,769		$	1,739		$	1,803		$	1,325		$	1,979		$	1,627

Share-based Compensation		90			86			85			69			76			89			40			70
One-time expenses
Settlements, penalties & interest		—			27			31			—			—			—			—			25
Acquisition and transaction costs		195			369			147			—			—			—			—			—
Non-GAAP Research and Development Expense	$	1,688		$	1,480		$	1,506		$	1,670		$	1,727		$	1,236		$	1,939		$	1,532

⁽¹⁾Note that first quarters are seasonally strong as recurring year-end W2/ACA revenue is recognized in this period.

ASURE SOFTWARE, INC. RECONCILIATION OF NON-GAAP AND ADJUSTED FINANCIAL MEASURES (cont.) (unaudited)

(in thousands)	Q3-24			Q2-24			Q1-24			Q4-23			Q3-23			Q2-23			Q1-23			Q4-22
Revenue⁽¹⁾	$	29,304		$	28,044		$	31,652		$	26,264		$	29,334		$	30,420		$	33,064		$	29,292

GAAP Net (Loss) Income to Adjusted EBITDA
GAAP Net (Loss) Income	$	(3,901	)	$	(4,360	)	$	(308	)	$	(3,582	)	$	(2,206	)	$	(3,765	)	$	339		$	(1,056	)

Interest expense, net		109			(53	)		(156	)		(24	)		782			1,593			1,944			1,429
Income taxes		170			231			33			(158	)		(123	)		627			(237	)		(94	)
Depreciation		1,497			1,402			1,361			1,148			1,185			1,542			1,219			1,039
Amortization – intangibles		4,345			4,096			3,499			3,743			3,384			3,343			3,570			3,648
EBITDA	$	2,220		$	1,316		$	4,429		$	1,127		$	3,022		$	3,340		$	6,835		$	4,966
EBITDA Margin		7.6	%		4.7	%		14.0	%		4.3	%		10.3	%		11.0	%		20.7	%		17.0	%

Share-based Compensation		1,591			1,488			1,902			1,260			1,251			1,582			1,337			838
One Time Expenses
Settlements, penalties & interest		375			339			147			283			140			436			117			62
Acquisition and transaction costs		1,001			914			254			51			—			—			—			—
Other non-recurring expenses		253			—			86			53			—			633			—			—
Other (expense) income, net		—			—			(10	)		1			1,800			93			(83	)		139
Adjusted EBITDA	$	5,440		$	4,057		$	6,808		$	2,775		$	6,213		$	6,084		$	8,206		$	6,005
Adjusted EBITDA Margin		18.6	%		14.5	%		21.5	%		10.6	%		21.2	%		20.0	%		24.8	%		20.5	%

⁽¹⁾Note that first quarters are seasonally strong as recurring year-end W2/ACA revenue is recognized in this period.

Investor Relations Contact
Patrick McKillop
Vice President, Investor Relations
617-335-5058
patrick.mckillop@asuresoftware.com

The MIL Network –

January 25, 2025

MIL-OSI: Inuvo to Host Third Quarter 2024 Financial Results Conference Call on Friday, November 8th at 8:30 A.M. EST

Source: GlobeNewswire (MIL-OSI)

LITTLE ROCK, Ark., Oct. 31, 2024 (GLOBE NEWSWIRE) — Inuvo, Inc. (NYSE American: INUV), provider of the first generative artificial intelligence (AI) advertiser solution made specifically for brands and agencies, will host a conference call on Friday, November 8, 2024, at 8:30 AM Eastern Standard Time to discuss its financial results and provide a business update for the for the third quarter ended September 30, 2024.

Conference Call Details:
Date: Friday, November 8, 2024
Time: 8:30 a.m. Eastern Standard Time
Toll-free Dial-in Number: 1-800-717-1738
International Dial-in Number: 1- 646-307-1865
Conference ID: 1131160
Webcast Link: HERE

A telephone replay will be available through Friday, November 22, 2024. To access the replay, please dial 1- 844-512-2921 (domestic) or 1- 412-317-6671 (international). At the system prompt, please enter the code 1131160 followed by the # sign. You will then be prompted for your name, company, and phone number. Playback will then automatically begin.

About Inuvo

Inuvo®, Inc. (NYSE American: INUV) is a market leader in Artificial Intelligence built for advertising. Its IntentKey AI solution is a first-of-its-kind proprietary and patented technology capable of identifying and actioning to the reasons why consumers are interested in products, services, or brands, not who those consumers are. To learn more, visit www.inuvo.com.

Safe Harbor / Forward-Looking Statements

This press release contains “forward-looking statements” within the meaning of the Private Securities Litigation Reform Act of 1995, including statements regarding Inuvo’s quarter-end financial close process and preparation of financial statements for the quarter that are subject to risks and uncertainties that could cause results to be materially different than expectations. These forward-looking statements are subject to risks and uncertainties that may cause actual results to differ materially, including, without limitation risks detailed from time to time in our filings with the Securities and Exchange Commission (the “SEC”), and represent our views only as of the date they are made and should not be relied upon as representing our views as of any subsequent date. You are urged to carefully review and consider any cautionary statements and other disclosures, including the statements made under the heading “Risk Factors” in Inuvo, Inc.’s Annual Report on Form 10-K for the fiscal year ended December 31, 2023 as filed on February 29, 2024, and our other filings with the SEC. Additionally, forward looking statements are subject to certain risks, trends, and uncertainties including the continued impact of Covid-19 on Inuvo’s business and operations. Inuvo cannot provide assurances that the assumptions upon which these forward-looking statements are based will prove to have been correct. Should one of these risks materialize, or should underlying assumptions prove incorrect, actual results may vary materially from those expressed or implied in any forward-looking statements, and investors are cautioned not to place undue reliance on these forward-looking statements, which are current only as of this date. Inuvo does not intend to update or revise any forward-looking statements made herein or any other forward-looking statements as a result of new information, future events or otherwise. Inuvo further expressly disclaims any written or oral statements made by a third party regarding the subject matter of this press release. The information which appears on our websites and our social media platforms is not part of this press release.

Inuvo Company Contact:
Wally Ruiz
Chief Financial Officer
Tel (501) 205-8397
wallace.ruiz@inuvo.com

Investor Relations :
David Waldman / Natalya Rudman
Crescendo Communications, LLC
Tel: (212) 671-1020
inuv@crescendo-ir.com

The MIL Network –

January 25, 2025
MIL-OSI New Zealand: United States of America
Source: New Zealand Ministry of Foreign Affairs and Trade – Safe Travel
- Reviewed: 7 June 2023, 08:45 NZST
- Still current at: 31 October 2024
Related news features

If you are planning international travel at this time, please read our COVID-19 related travel advice here, alongside our destination specific travel advice below.

Exercise increased caution in the United States due to the threat of terrorism (level 2 of 4).

United States of America

Terrorism
The United States Department of Homeland Security regularly issues terrorism-related advice and updates. For current alerts, see the US National Terror Advisory System webpage.

The United States remains a target of terrorist interest, both from international terror groups and from domestic-based individual’s adhering to various forms of violent extremist ideologies. Credible information assessed by US authorities indicates that individuals or groups have developed both the intent and capability to conduct terrorist attacks in the US. Attacks could be indiscriminate, targeting law enforcement officials, government buildings and areas frequented by foreigners including transport hubs and major events.

New Zealanders in the United States are advised to keep themselves informed of potential risks to safety and security by monitoring the media and other local information sources. Follow any instructions issued by the local authorities and be aware of your surroundings in public places such as shopping malls, markets, monuments, places of worship, tourist destinations, demonstrations, large gatherings and on public transport.

In the event of an attack, leave the area as soon as it is safe to do so. Avoid the area in case of secondary attacks.

Crime
Petty crime such as theft and pickpocketing can occur, particularly in urban centres, tourist locations and on public transport. New Zealanders should stay alert to their surroundings, stay vigilant on public transport and avoid leaving belongings unattended, including in rental vehicles.

There is a higher incidence of violent crime and firearm possession than in New Zealand. In many states, it is legal for United States citizens to openly carry firearms in public. Violent crime has targeted individuals and groups from the LGBTQIA+ community and those with diverse ethnic, cultural and religious backgrounds. However, crime rates vary considerably across cities and suburbs and while tourists are rarely targeted, there is always a risk of being in the wrong place at the wrong time. New Zealanders should take care when travelling in unfamiliar areas including on public transport. Research your destination before travelling and seek local advice if you are concerned about levels of criminal activity.

Active shooter incidents occur in the United States. For advice on how to respond to an active shooter situation, please see the US Department of Homeland Security website.

You should exercise caution if crossing the border by car into Mexico from Arizona, California, New Mexico and Texas. There have been increased incidents of crime associated with drug trading and some foreign nationals have been targeted indiscriminately.

Be aware of rental and financial scams via websites and social media. Credit card and ATM fraud including debit card cloning is also a risk to travellers.

Civil Unrest and Political Tension
Protests and demonstrations regularly occur. We advise New Zealanders to follow any advice issued by the local authorities, monitor local media for developments and avoid all demonstrations, protests and rallies as even those intended as peaceful have the potential to result in violence.

Natural Disasters
The US can experience severe weather events, such as hurricanes, especially in May or June to November regularly impacting the eastern seaboard, Gulf Coast, Hawaii, Puerto Rico, and the US Virgin Islands.

Tornados are most frequent and at their highest intensities across the Central Plains and parts of the Midwest. While tornadoes can form at any time of year, conditions are most favourable in the spring and summer months (March to September).

Severe snowstorms during winter can cause disruptions to critical infrastructure, including power cuts. Winter storms may also lead to widespread flight delays and cancellations.

Many parts of the US are also prone to earthquakes including Alaska, California, Guam, Hawaii, Nevada, Northern Mariana Islands, Oklahoma, Oregon, Puerto Rico, Washington state and the US Virgin Islands.

Contact your travel operator or airline for the latest departure information, and monitor local weather forecasts. If there is a severe weather event, or natural disaster, follow the advice of the local authorities and keep your family and friends back in New Zealand informed of your safety and well-being.

General Travel Advice
The Transport Security Administration website provides guidance for airline passengers travelling to the United States.

Travellers carrying electronic devices, such as laptops and mobile phones, should be aware that these devices may be subject to security checks by United States border authorities.

Immigration regulations are strictly enforced. Overstaying can result in detention then deportation. See our United States travel tips.

New Zealanders travelling or resident in the United States should have comprehensive travel and medical insurance policies in place. Medical costs in the United States are extremely high and the New Zealand government cannot assist with medical expenses.

New Zealanders in the United States are encouraged to register their travel with the Ministry of Foreign Affairs and Trade.

Travel tips

The New Zealand Embassy Washington DC, United States of America

Street Address 37 Observatory Circle NW, Washington, DC 20008, United States of America Telephone +1 202 328 4800 Fax +1 202 667 5227 Email WSHinfo@mfat.govt.nz Web Site https://www.mfat.govt.nz/en/countries-and-regions/americas/united-states-of-america/new-zealand-embassy-to-the-united-states-of-america/ Hours Mon – Fri 0830 – 1700 hrs

The New Zealand Consulate-General Los Angeles, United States of America

Street Address Suite 600E, 2425 Olympic Boulevard, Santa Monica, CA 90404, United States of America Telephone +1 310 566 6555 Fax +1 310 566 6556 Email nzcg.la@mfat.net Web Site https://www.mfat.govt.nz/en/countries-and-regions/americas/united-states-of-america/new-zealand-consulate-general-los-angeles/ Hours Mon – Fri 0830 – 1300, 1330 – 1630 hrs

New Zealand Consulate-General Honolulu, United States of America

Street Address 733 Bishop Street, 2020, Honolulu, HI 96813 Telephone +1 808 675 5555 Fax +1 808 675 5561 Email HLUEnquiries@mfat.govt.nz

New Zealand Consulate-General New York, United States of America

Street Address 41st Floor, 295 Madison Ave, New York, 10017, United States of America Telephone +1 212 832 4038 Fax +1 212 832 7602 Hours Mon – Fri 0900 – 1230 hrs for consular calls

New Zealand Consulate Atlanta, United States of America

Street Address 47 Hawk Road, Newnan, Georgia 30263, United States of America Telephone +1 202 328 4800 Email newzealand@mindspring.com

New Zealand Consulate Boston, United States of America

Telephone +1 202 328 4800 Email nzconsulboston@gmail.com

New Zealand Consulate Chicago, United States of America

Street Address 1223 Oakwood Lane, Glenview, IL 60025 Postal Address 1223 Oakwood Lane, 6400 Shafer Ct 60025, Glenview, IL Telephone +1 202 328 4800 Email nzconsulatechicago@gmail.com

New Zealand Consulate Houston, United States of America

Street Address 4424 W. Sam Houston Pkwy North, Suite 100, Houston, TX 77041, United States of America Telephone +1 202 328 4800 Email connelly@nzhonoraryconsul.org

New Zealand Consulate Oregon, United States of America

Street Address 430 SW 13th Avenue, Portland, Oregon 97205, United States of America Telephone +1 310 566 6555 Email cjs@theswindells.org

New Zealand Consulate Sacramento, United States of America

Street Address 44733 North El Macero Drive, El Macero, CA 95618 – 1066, United States of America Telephone +1 310 566 6555 Email starrned@msn.com

New Zealand Consulate Salt Lake City, United States of America

Street Address 1655 Linden Lane, Bountiful, UT 84010, United States of America Telephone +1 310 566 6555 Email Iain.mckay1@hotmail.com

New Zealand Consulate San Francisco (Northern California), United States of America

Postal Address PO Box 1276, Burlingame, CA 94010, United States of America Telephone +1 310 566 6555 Email NewZealandHCSF@gmail.com

New Zealand Consulate Seattle, United States of America

Street Address 4010 Lake Washington Blvd NE, Suite 300, Kirkland WA 98033, United States of America Telephone +1 310 566 6555 Email NZHonConSeattleWA@outlook.com

See our regional advice for North America

Top of page

MIL OSI New Zealand News –
January 25, 2025
MIL-Evening Report: Trust matters but we also need these 3 things to boost vaccine coverage
Source: The Conversation (Au and NZ) – By Holly Seale, Associate Professor, School of Population Health, UNSW Sydney

Julien Jean Zayatz/Shutterstock

Australia’s COVID vaccine roll-out started slowly, with supply shortages and logistical shortcomings. Once it got going, we immunised more than 95% of the population.

This week’s COVID inquiry report contains a number of recommendations to improve Australia’s vaccine preparedness the next time we face a pandemic or health emergency.

While the inquiry gets most things right, as vaccine experts, we argue the government response should be broadened in three areas:
- expanding compensation programs for people who suffer any type of vaccine injury
- better understanding why people aren’t up-to-date with their vaccinations
- equipping community helpers in marginalised communities to deliver information about vaccines and combat misinformation.
Australians should be compensated after vaccine injuries – not just during pandemics

The inquiry recommends reviewing Australia’s COVID vaccine claims scheme in the next 12 to 18 months, to inform future schemes in national health emergencies.

Early in the pandemic, vaccine experts called on the Australian government to establish a COVID vaccine injury compensation scheme.

This meant people who were injured after suffering a rare but serious injury, or the families of those who died, would receive compensation when there had been no fault in the manufacturing or administration of the vaccine.

Vaccine experts recommended the creation of such a scheme based on the principle of reciprocity. The Australian public was asked to accept the recommended COVID vaccines in good faith for their health benefit and the benefit of the community. So they should be compensated if something went wrong.

In 2021, the Australian government announced the COVID-19 Vaccine Claims Scheme. Australia had no such scheme before this, in stark contrast to 25 other countries including the United States, United Kingdom and New Zealand.

Australia’s scheme closed on September 30 2024.

The inquiry report recommends reviewing:
- the complexity of the claims process
- delayed or denied payments
- any links between the scheme and vaccine hesitancy.
However, this is currently framed only within the scope of the scheme being used for future epidemic or pandemic responses.

Instead, we need a permanent, ongoing vaccine compensation scheme for all routine vaccines available on the National Immunisation Program.

As we’ve learnt from similar schemes in other countries, this would contribute to the trust and confidence needed to improve the uptake of vaccines currently on the program, and new ones added in the future. It is also right and fair to look after those injured by vaccines in rare instances.

Not getting vaccinated isn’t just about a lack of trust

The COVID inquiry recommends developing a national strategy to rebuild community trust in vaccines and improve vaccination rates, including childhood (non-COVID) vaccine rates, which are currently declining.

The COVID vaccine program has affected trust in routine vaccines. Childhood vaccine coverage has declined 1–2%. And there is a persistent issue around timeliness – kids not getting their vaccines within 30 days of the recommended time point.

The national Vaxinsights project examined the social and behavioural drivers of under-vaccination among parents of children under five years. It found access issues were the main barriers to partially vaccinated children. Cost, difficulty making an appointment and the ability to prioritise appointments due to other conflicting needs were other barriers. Trust was not a major barrier for this group.

However for unvaccinated children, vaccine safety and effectiveness concerns, and trust in information from the health-care provider, were the leading issues, rather than access barriers.

To improve childhood vaccination rates, governments need to monitor the social and behavioural drivers of vaccination over time to track changes in vaccine acceptance. They also need to address barriers to accessing immunisation services, including affordability and clinic opening hours.

It is also imperative we learn from the lessons during COVID and better engage communities and priority populations, such as First Nations communities, people with disabilities and those from different cultural groups, to build trust and improve access through community drop-in and outreach vaccine programs.

To address the decline in adult COVID vaccination we need to focus on perceptions of need, risk and value, rather than just focusing on trust. If adults don’t think they are at risk, they won’t get the vaccine. Unfortunately, when it comes to COVID, people have moved on and few people believe they need boosters.

Variant changes or enhancements to the vaccine (such as combined vaccines to protect against COVID and flu, or RSV or vaccines with long last protection) may encourage people to get vaccinated in the future. In the meantime, we agree with the inquiry that we should focus on those most at risk of severe outcomes, including residents in aged care and those with chronic health conditions.

Invest in community-led strategies to improve uptake

The COVID inquiry recommends developing a communication strategy for health emergencies to ensure all Australians, including those in priority populations, families and industries, have the information they need.

While these are not strictly focused on the promotion of vaccination, the suggestions – including the need to work closely with and fund community and representative organisations – are aligned with what our COVID research showed.

However, the government should go one step further. Communication about vaccines must be tailored, translated for different cultural groups, and easy to understand.

In some settings, messages about the vaccines will have the most impact if they come from a health-care worker. But this is not always the case. Some people prefer to hear from trusted voices from their own communities. In First Nations communities, these roles are often combined in the form of Aboriginal Health Workers.

We must support these voices in future health emergencies.

During COVID, there was insufficient support and training for community helpers – such as community leaders, faith leaders, bilingual community workers, and other trusted voices – to support their vaccine communication efforts.

The government should consider implementing a national training program to support those tasked (or volunteering) to pass on information about vaccines during health emergencies. This would provide them with the information and confidence they need to undertake this role, as well as equipping them to address misinformation.

Holly Seale is an investigator on research studies funded by NHMRC and has previously received funding from NSW Ministry of Health, as well as from Sanofi Pasteur, Moderna and Pfizer for investigator driven research and consulting fees.

Julie Leask receives a fellowship from the National Health and Medical Research Council and research funding from the World Health Organization. She received reimbursement for overseas travel costs from Sanofi in April 2024.

Margie Danchin receives funding from the Victorian and Commonwealth governments, NHMRC/MRFF and DFAT.

– ref. Trust matters but we also need these 3 things to boost vaccine coverage – https://theconversation.com/trust-matters-but-we-also-need-these-3-things-to-boost-vaccine-coverage-242487
MIL OSI Analysis – EveningReport.nz –
January 25, 2025

MIL-OSI: SHELL PLC 3rd QUARTER 2024 UNAUDITED RESULTS

Source: GlobeNewswire (MIL-OSI)

SHELL PLC
3rd QUARTER 2024 UNAUDITED RESULTS



SUMMARY OF UNAUDITED RESULTS
Quarters				$ million		Nine months
Q3 2024	Q2 2024	Q3 2023	%¹		Reference	2024	2023	%
4,291	3,517	7,044	+22	Income/(loss) attributable to Shell plc shareholders		15,166	18,887	-20
6,028	6,293	6,224	-4	Adjusted Earnings	A	20,055	20,944	-4
16,005	16,806	16,336	-5	Adjusted EBITDA	A	51,523	52,204	-1
14,684	13,508	12,332	+9	Cash flow from operating activities		41,522	41,622	—
(3,857)	(3,338)	(4,827)		Cash flow from investing activities		(10,723)	(12,080)
10,827	10,170	7,505		Free cash flow	G	30,799	29,542
4,950	4,719	5,649		Cash capital expenditure	C	14,161	17,280
9,570	8,950	10,097	+7	Operating expenses	F	27,517	29,062	-5
8,864	8,651	9,735	+2	Underlying operating expenses	F	26,569	28,635	-7
12.8%	12.8%	13.9%		ROACE2	D	12.8%	13.9%
76,613	75,468	82,147		Total debt	E	76,613	82,147
35,234	38,314	40,470		Net debt	E	35,234	40,470
15.7%	17.0%	17.3%		Gearing	E	15.7%	17.3%
2,801	2,817	2,706	-1	Oil and gas production available for sale (thousand boe/d)		2,843	2,779	+2
0.69	0.55	1.06	+25	Basic earnings per share ($)		2.39	2.78	-14
0.96	0.99	0.93	-3	Adjusted Earnings per share ($)	B	3.16	3.08	+3
0.3440	0.3440	0.3310	—	Dividend per share ($)		1.0320	0.9495	+9

1.Q3 on Q2 change

2.Effective first quarter 2024, the definition has been amended and comparative information has been revised. See Reference D.

Quarter Analysis1

Income attributable to Shell plc shareholders, compared with the second quarter 2024, reflected lower refining margins, lower realised oil prices and higher operating expenses partly offset by favourable tax movements, and higher Integrated Gas volumes.

Third quarter 2024 income attributable to Shell plc shareholders also included unfavourable movements relating to an accounting mismatch due to fair value accounting of commodity derivatives, charges related to redundancy and restructuring, and net impairment charges and reversals. These items are included in identified items amounting to a net loss of $1.3 billion in the quarter. This compares with identified items in the second quarter 2024 which amounted to a net loss of $2.7 billion.

Adjusted Earnings and Adjusted EBITDA2 were driven by the same factors as income attributable to Shell plc shareholders and adjusted for the above identified items and the cost of supplies adjustment of positive $0.5 billion.

Cash flow from operating activities for the third quarter 2024 was $14.7 billion, and primarily driven by Adjusted EBITDA, and working capital inflows of $2.7 billion partly offset by tax payments of $3.0 billion. The working capital inflow mainly reflected inventory movements due to lower oil prices and lower volumes.

Cash flow from investing activities for the quarter was an outflow of $3.9 billion, and included cash capital expenditure of $4.9 billion.

Net debt and Gearing: At the end of the third quarter 2024, net debt was $35.2 billion, compared with $38.3 billion at the end of the second quarter 2024, mainly reflecting free cash flow, partly offset by share buybacks, cash dividends paid to Shell plc shareholders, lease additions and interest payments. Gearing was 15.7% at the end of the third quarter 2024, compared with 17.0% at the end of the second quarter 2024, mainly driven by lower net debt.



SHELL PLC 3rd QUARTER 2024 UNAUDITED RESULTS

Shareholder distributions

Total shareholder distributions in the quarter amounted to $5.7 billion comprising repurchases of shares of $3.5 billion and cash dividends paid to Shell plc shareholders of $2.2 billion. Dividends declared to Shell plc shareholders for the third quarter 2024 amount to $0.3440 per share. Shell has now completed $3.5 billion of share buybacks announced in the second quarter 2024 results announcement. Today, Shell announces a share buyback programme of $3.5 billion which is expected to be completed by the fourth quarter 2024 results announcement.

Nine Months Analysis1

Income attributable to Shell plc shareholders, compared with the first nine months 2023, reflected lower refining margins, lower LNG trading and optimisation margins, lower realised LNG and gas prices as well as lower trading and optimisation margins of power and pipeline gas in Renewables and Energy Solutions, partly offset by lower operating expenses, higher Marketing margins and volumes, higher realised Chemicals margins, and higher Integrated Gas and Upstream volumes.

First nine months 2024 income attributable to Shell plc shareholders also included net impairment charges and reversals, reclassifications from equity to profit and loss of cumulative currency translation differences related to funding structures, unfavourable movements relating to an accounting mismatch due to fair value accounting of commodity derivatives, and charges related to redundancy and restructuring, partly offset by favourable differences in exchange rates and inflationary adjustments on deferred tax. These charges, reclassifications and movements are included in identified items amounting to a net loss of $4.6 billion. This compares with identified items in the first nine months 2023 which amounted to a net loss of $2.2 billion.

Adjusted Earnings and Adjusted EBITDA2 for the first nine months 2024 were driven by the same factors as income attributable to Shell plc shareholders and adjusted for identified items and the cost of supplies adjustment of positive $0.3 billion.

Cash flow from operating activities for the first nine months 2024 was $41.5 billion, and primarily driven by Adjusted EBITDA, the timing impact of payments relating to emission certificates and biofuel programmes of $1.2 billion and cash inflows relating to commodity derivatives of $1.2 billion, partly offset by tax payments of $9.1 billion, and working capital outflow of $0.3 billion.

Cash flow from investing activities for the first nine months 2024 was an outflow of $10.7 billion and included cash capital expenditure of $14.2 billion, partly offset by divestment proceeds of $2.0 billion, and interest received of $1.8 billion.

This Unaudited Condensed Interim Financial Report, together with supplementary financial and operational disclosure for this quarter, is available at www.shell.com/investors 3 .

1.All earnings amounts are shown post-tax, unless stated otherwise.

2.Adjusted EBITDA is without taxation.

3.Not incorporated by reference.

THIRD QUARTER 2024 PORTFOLIO DEVELOPMENTS

Integrated Gas

In July 2024, we announced the final investment decision (FID) on the Manatee project, an undeveloped gas field in the East Coast Marine Area (ECMA) in Trinidad and Tobago.

In July 2024, we signed an agreement to invest in the Abu Dhabi National Oil Company’s (ADNOC) Ruwais LNG project in Abu Dhabi through a 10% participating interest. The Ruwais LNG project will consist of two 4.8 mtpa LNG liquefaction trains with a total capacity of 9.6 mtpa.

In August 2024, Arrow Energy, an incorporated joint venture between Shell (50%) and PetroChina (50%), announced plans to develop Phase 2 of Arrow Energy’s Surat Gas Project in Queensland, Australia. The gas from the project will flow to the Shell-operated QCLNG LNG (joint venture between Shell (73.75%), CNOOC (25%) and MidOcean Energy (1.25%)) facility on Curtis Island, near Gladstone.

Upstream

In July 2024, the operator of the Jerun field in Malaysia, SapuraOMV Upstream Sdn Bhd, announced that first gas has been achieved. Jerun is operated by SapuraOMV Upstream (40%) in partnership with Sarawak Shell Berhad (30%) and PETRONAS Carigali Sdn Bhd (30%).

In August 2024, we announced the FID on a ‘waterflood’ project at our Vito asset in the US Gulf of Mexico. Water will be injected into the reservoir formation to displace additional oil.

Page 2



SHELL PLC 3rd QUARTER 2024 UNAUDITED RESULTS

Marketing

In July 2024, we announced that we are temporarily pausing on-site construction work at our 820,000 tonnes a year biofuels facility at the Shell Energy and Chemicals Park Rotterdam in the Netherlands to address project delivery and ensure future competitiveness given current market conditions.

Renewables and Energy Solutions

In October 2024, we signed an agreement to acquire a 100% equity stake in RISEC Holdings, LLC (RISEC), which owns a 609-megawatt (MW) two-unit combined-cycle gas turbine power plant in Rhode Island, USA. The transaction is subject to regulatory approvals and is expected to close in the first quarter 2025.

Page 2



SHELL PLC 3rd QUARTER 2024 UNAUDITED RESULTS

PERFORMANCE BY SEGMENT



INTEGRATED GAS
Quarters				$ million		Nine months
Q3 2024	Q2 2024	Q3 2023	%¹		Reference	2024	2023	%
2,631	2,454	2,156	+7	Segment earnings		7,846	5,325	+47
(240)	(220)	(375)		Of which: Identified items	A	(1,379)	(4,625)
2,871	2,675	2,531	+7	Adjusted Earnings	A	9,225	9,951	-7
5,234	5,039	4,874	+4	Adjusted EBITDA	A	16,410	17,189	-5
3,623	4,183	4,009	-13	Cash flow from operating activities	A	12,518	13,923	-10
1,236	1,151	1,099		Cash capital expenditure	C	3,429	3,000
136	137	122	-1	Liquids production available for sale (thousand b/d)		137	134	+2
4,669	4,885	4,517	-4	Natural gas production available for sale (million scf/d)		4,835	4,744	+2
941	980	900	-4	Total production available for sale (thousand boe/d)		971	952	+2
7.50	6.95	6.88	+8	LNG liquefaction volumes (million tonnes)		22.03	21.23	+4
17.04	16.41	16.01	+4	LNG sales volumes (million tonnes)		50.32	49.01	+3

1.Q3 on Q2 change

Integrated Gas includes liquefied natural gas (LNG), conversion of natural gas into gas-to-liquids (GTL) fuels and other products. It includes natural gas and liquids exploration and extraction, and the operation of the upstream and midstream infrastructure necessary to deliver these to market. Integrated Gas also includes the marketing, trading and optimisation of LNG.

Quarter Analysis1

Segment earnings, compared with the second quarter 2024, reflected higher LNG liquefaction volumes (increase of $237 million).

Third quarter 2024 segment earnings also included unfavourable movements of $213 million relating to an accounting mismatch due to fair value accounting of commodity derivatives. These unfavourable movements are part of identified items and compare with the second quarter 2024 which included a charge of $122 million due to unrecoverable indirect tax receivables, and unfavourable movements of $98 million due to the fair value accounting of commodity derivatives. As part of Shell’s normal business, commodity derivative hedge contracts are entered into for mitigation of economic exposures on future purchases, sales and inventory.

Adjusted Earnings and Adjusted EBITDA2 were driven by the same factors as the segment earnings and adjusted for identified items.

Cash flow from operating activities for the quarter was primarily driven by Adjusted EBITDA, partly offset by tax payments of $814 million, net cash outflows related to derivatives of $373 million and working capital outflows of $247 million.

Total oil and gas production, compared with the second quarter 2024, decreased by 4% mainly due to production-sharing contract effects, and higher maintenance in Trinidad and Tobago. LNG liquefaction volumes increased by 8% mainly due to higher feedgas supply in Nigeria, and Trinidad and Tobago.

Nine Months Analysis1

Segment earnings, compared with the first nine months 2023, reflected the combined effect of lower contributions from trading and optimisation and lower realised prices (decrease of $1,787 million), partly offset by higher volumes (increase of $513 million), lower operating expenses (decrease of $171 million), and favourable deferred tax movements ($168 million).

First nine months 2024 segment earnings also included unfavourable movements of $1,198 million relating to an accounting mismatch due to fair value accounting of commodity derivatives. These unfavourable movements are part of identified items and compare with the first nine months 2023 which included unfavourable movements of $2,821 million due to the fair value accounting of commodity derivatives, and net impairment charges and reversals of $1,700 million. As part of Shell’s normal business, commodity derivative hedge contracts are entered into for mitigation of economic exposures on future purchases, sales and inventory.

Adjusted Earnings and Adjusted EBITDA2 were driven by the same factors as the segment earnings and adjusted for identified items.

Page 3



SHELL PLC 3rd QUARTER 2024 UNAUDITED RESULTS

Cash flow from operating activities for the first nine months 2024 was primarily driven by Adjusted EBITDA, partly offset by tax payments of $2,320 million and net cash outflows related to derivatives of $1,586 million.

Total oil and gas production, compared with the first nine months 2023, increased by 2% mainly due to ramp-up of fields in Oman and Australia, and lower maintenance in Australia. LNG liquefaction volumes increased by 4% mainly due to lower unplanned maintenance in Australia.

1.All earnings amounts are shown post-tax, unless stated otherwise.

2.Adjusted EBITDA is without taxation.

Page 4



SHELL PLC 3rd QUARTER 2024 UNAUDITED RESULTS



UPSTREAM
Quarters				$ million		Nine months
Q3 2024	Q2 2024	Q3 2023	%¹		Reference	2024	2023	%
2,289	2,179	1,999	+5	Segment earnings		6,741	6,388	+6
(153)	(157)	(238)		Of which: Identified items	A	28	(357)
2,443	2,336	2,237	+5	Adjusted Earnings	A	6,712	6,746	—
7,871	7,829	7,433	+1	Adjusted EBITDA	A	23,588	22,750	+4
5,268	5,739	5,336	-8	Cash flow from operating activities	A	16,734	15,663	+7
1,974	1,829	2,007		Cash capital expenditure	C	5,813	5,906
1,321	1,297	1,311	+2	Liquids production available for sale (thousand b/d)		1,316	1,313	—
2,844	2,818	2,564	+1	Natural gas production available for sale (million scf/d)		2,933	2,687	+9
1,811	1,783	1,753	+2	Total production available for sale (thousand boe/d)		1,822	1,776	+3

1.Q3 on Q2 change

The Upstream segment includes exploration and extraction of crude oil, natural gas and natural gas liquids. It also markets and transports oil and gas, and operates the infrastructure necessary to deliver them to the market.

Quarter Analysis1

Segment earnings, compared with the second quarter 2024, reflected lower well write-offs (decrease of $139 million), favourable tax movements ($96 million), lower operating expenses (decrease of $63 million), and lower depreciation charges (decrease of $57 million), partly offset by lower realised liquids prices (decrease of $304 million).

Third quarter 2024 segment earnings also included charges of $138 million related to redundancy and restructuring and charges of $104 million related to decommissioning provisions. These charges are part of identified items, and compare with the second quarter 2024 which included a loss of $143 million related to the impact of the weakening Brazilian real on a deferred tax position, and a loss of $122 million related to a tax settlement in Brazil, partly offset by a gain of $139 million related to the impact of inflationary adjustments in Argentina on a deferred tax position.

Adjusted Earnings and Adjusted EBITDA2 were driven by the same factors as the segment earnings and adjusted for identified items.

Cash flow from operating activities for the quarter was primarily driven by Adjusted EBITDA, partly offset by tax payments of $2,074 million.

Total production, compared with the second quarter 2024, increased mainly due to new oil production.

Nine Months Analysis1

Segment earnings, compared with the first nine months 2023, reflected unfavourable tax movements ($351 million), higher well write-offs (increase of $327 million) and the net impact of lower realised gas and higher realised liquids prices (decrease of $278 million), partly offset by the comparative favourable impact of $910 million mainly relating to gas storage effects.

First nine months 2024 segment earnings also included gains of $676 million related to the impact of inflationary adjustments in Argentina on a deferred tax position, partly offset by charges of $179 million related to redundancy and restructuring, net impairment charges and reversals of $171 million and a loss of $164 million related to the impact of the weakening Brazilian real on a deferred tax position. These gains and charges are part of identified items, and compare with the first nine months 2023 which included charges of $188 million from impairments, legal provisions of $169 million and deferred tax charges of $132 million due to amendments to IAS 12, partly offset by favourable movements of $106 million relating to an accounting mismatch due to fair value accounting of commodity derivatives. As part of Shell’s normal business, commodity derivative hedge contracts are entered into for mitigation of economic exposures on future purchases, sales and inventory.

Adjusted Earnings and Adjusted EBITDA2 were driven by the same factors as the segment earnings and adjusted for identified items.

Cash flow from operating activities for the first nine months 2024 was primarily driven by Adjusted EBITDA, partly offset by tax payments of $5,832 million.

Total production, compared with the first nine months 2023, increased mainly due to new oil production, partly offset by field decline.

Page 5



SHELL PLC 3rd QUARTER 2024 UNAUDITED RESULTS

1.All earnings amounts are shown post-tax, unless stated otherwise.

2.Adjusted EBITDA is without taxation.

Page 6



SHELL PLC 3rd QUARTER 2024 UNAUDITED RESULTS



MARKETING
Quarters				$ million		Nine months
Q3 2024	Q2 2024	Q3 2023	%¹		Reference	2024	2023	%
760	257	629	+196	Segment earnings2		1,791	2,832	-37
(422)	(825)	(12)		Of which: Identified items2	A	(1,255)	314
1,182	1,082	641	+9	Adjusted Earnings2	A	3,046	2,518	+21
2,081	1,999	1,453	+4	Adjusted EBITDA2	A	5,767	4,837	+19
2,722	1,958	397	+39	Cash flow from operating activities2	A	5,999	3,794	+58
525	644	959		Cash capital expenditure2	C	1,634	4,406
2,945	2,868	3,138	+3	Marketing sales volumes (thousand b/d)2		2,859	3,062	-7

1.Q3 on Q2 change

2.Wholesale commercial fuels, previously reported in the Chemicals and Products segment, is reported in the Marketing segment (Mobility) with effect from Q1 2024. Comparative information for the Marketing segment and the Chemicals and Products segment has been revised.

The Marketing segment comprises the Mobility, Lubricants, and Sectors and Decarbonisation businesses. The Mobility business operates Shell’s retail network including electric vehicle charging services and the Wholesale commercial fuels business which provides fuels for transport, industry and heating. The Lubricants business produces, markets and sells lubricants for road transport, and machinery used in manufacturing, mining, power generation, agriculture and construction. The Sectors and Decarbonisation business sells fuels, speciality products and services including low-carbon energy solutions to a broad range of commercial customers including the aviation, marine, and agricultural sectors.

Quarter Analysis1

Segment earnings, compared with the second quarter 2024, reflected higher Marketing margins (increase of $139 million) mainly driven by improved Mobility unit margins and impact of seasonally higher volumes partly offset by lower lubricants and Sectors and Decarbonisation margins. Segment earnings also reflected favourable tax movements ($55 million). These were partly offset by higher operating expenses (increase of $63 million).

Third quarter 2024 segment earnings also included impairment charges of $179 million, charges of $98 million related to redundancy and restructuring, and net losses of $84 million related to sale of assets. These charges and unfavourable movements are part of identified items, and compare with the second quarter 2024 impairment charges of $783 million mainly relating to an asset in the Netherlands, and charges of $50 million related to redundancy and restructuring.

Adjusted Earnings and Adjusted EBITDA2 were driven by the same factors as the segment earnings and adjusted for identified items.

Cash flow from operating activities for the quarter was primarily driven by Adjusted EBITDA, working capital inflows of $792 million, and the timing impact of payments relating to emission certificates and biofuel programmes of $427 million. These inflows were partly offset by non-cash cost of supplies adjustment of $334 million and tax payments of $241 million.

Marketing sales volumes (comprising hydrocarbon sales), compared with the second quarter 2024, increased mainly due to seasonality.

Nine Months Analysis1

Segment earnings, compared with the first nine months 2023, reflected higher Marketing margins (increase of $582 million) including higher unit margins in Mobility, Lubricants and higher Sectors and Decarbonisation margins. Segment earnings also reflected lower operating expenses (decrease of $170 million). These were partly offset by higher depreciation charges (increase of $128 million) mainly due to asset acquisitions, and unfavourable tax movements ($94 million).

First nine months 2024 segment earnings also included impairment charges of $965 million mainly relating to an asset in the Netherlands, charges of $163 million related to redundancy and restructuring, and net losses of $140 million related to the sale of assets. These charges are part of identified items and compare with the first nine months 2023 which included gains of $298 million related to indirect tax credits, and favourable movements of $60 million relating to an accounting mismatch due to fair value accounting of commodity derivatives. As part of Shell’s normal business, commodity derivative hedge contracts are entered into for mitigation of economic exposures on future purchases, sales and inventory.

Adjusted Earnings and Adjusted EBITDA2 were driven by the same factors as the segment earnings and adjusted for identified items.

Page 7



SHELL PLC 3rd QUARTER 2024 UNAUDITED RESULTS

Cash flow from operating activities for the first nine months 2024 was primarily driven by Adjusted EBITDA, the timing impact of payments relating to emission certificates and biofuel programmes of $966 million, and working capital inflows of $153 million. These inflows were partly offset by tax payments of $432 million, and non-cash cost of supplies adjustment of $256 million.

Marketing sales volumes (comprising hydrocarbon sales), compared with the first nine months 2023, decreased mainly in Mobility including increased focus on value over volume.

1.All earnings amounts are shown post-tax, unless stated otherwise.

2.Adjusted EBITDA is without taxation.

Page 8



SHELL PLC 3rd QUARTER 2024 UNAUDITED RESULTS



CHEMICALS AND PRODUCTS
Quarters				$ million		Nine months
Q3 2024	Q2 2024	Q3 2023	%¹		Reference	2024	2023	%
341	587	1,250	-42	Segment earnings2		2,085	3,310	-37
(122)	(499)	(213)		Of which: Identified items2	A	(1,078)	(278)
463	1,085	1,463	-57	Adjusted Earnings2	A	3,163	3,588	-12
1,240	2,242	2,661	-45	Adjusted EBITDA2	A	6,308	6,819	-7
3,321	2,249	2,862	+48	Cash flow from operating activities2	A	5,221	6,364	-18
761	638	837		Cash capital expenditure2	C	1,898	2,027
1,305	1,429	1,334	-9	Refinery processing intake (thousand b/d)		1,388	1,360	+2
3,015	3,052	2,998	-1	Chemicals sales volumes (thousand tonnes)		8,950	8,656	+3

1.Q3 on Q2 change

The Chemicals and Products segment includes chemicals manufacturing plants with their own marketing network, and refineries which turn crude oil and other feedstocks into a range of oil products which are moved and marketed around the world for domestic, industrial and transport use. The segment also includes the pipeline business, trading and optimisation of crude oil, oil products and petrochemicals, and Oil Sands activities (the extraction of bitumen from mined oil sands and its conversion into synthetic crude oil).

Quarter Analysis1

Segment earnings, compared with the second quarter 2024, reflected lower Products margins (decrease of $492 million) mainly driven by lower refining margins and lower margins from trading and optimisation. Segment earnings also reflected lower Chemicals margins (decrease of $189 million) mainly due to lower utilisation and lower realised prices. In addition, the third quarter 2024 reflected higher operating expenses (increase of $88 million). These were partly offset by favourable tax movements ($133 million).

Third quarter 2024 segment earnings also included charges of $101 million related to redundancy and restructuring, and net impairment charges and reversals of $92 million, partly offset by favourable movements of $95 million relating to an accounting mismatch due to fair value accounting of commodity derivatives. These charges and favourable movements are part of identified items, and compare with the second quarter 2024 which included net impairment charges and reversals of $708 million mainly relating to assets in Singapore, partly offset by favourable movements of $156 million due to the fair value accounting of commodity derivatives. As part of Shell’s normal business, commodity derivative hedge contracts are entered into for mitigation of economic exposures on future purchases, sales and inventory.

Adjusted Earnings and Adjusted EBITDA2 were driven by the same factors as the segment earnings and adjusted for identified items. In the third quarter 2024, Chemicals had negative Adjusted Earnings of $111 million and Products had positive Adjusted Earnings of $573 million.

Cash flow from operating activities for the quarter was primarily driven by working capital inflows of $2,131 million, Adjusted EBITDA, cash inflows relating to commodity derivatives of $88 million and dividends (net of profits) from joint ventures and associates of $63 million. These inflows were partly offset by non-cash cost of supplies adjustment of $331 million.

Chemicals manufacturing plant utilisation was 76% compared with 80% in the second quarter 2024, due to higher planned and unplanned maintenance.

Refinery utilisation was 81% compared with 92% in the second quarter 2024, due to higher planned and unplanned maintenance.

Nine Months Analysis1

Segment earnings, compared with the first nine months 2023, reflected lower Products margins (decrease of $1,458 million) mainly driven by lower refining margins and lower margins from trading and optimisation. Segment earnings also included unfavourable tax movements ($106 million). These were partly offset by higher Chemicals margins (increase of $516 million) due to higher realised prices and higher utilisation. In addition, the first nine months 2024 reflected lower operating expenses (decrease of $658 million).

First nine months 2024 segment earnings also included net impairment charges and reversals of $952 million mainly relating to assets in Singapore, charges of $139 million related to redundancy and restructuring, and unfavourable

Page 9



SHELL PLC 3rd QUARTER 2024 UNAUDITED RESULTS

movements of $69 million relating to an accounting mismatch due to fair value accounting of commodity derivatives. These charges and unfavourable movements are part of identified items, and compare with the first nine months 2023 which included losses of $227 million from net impairments and reversals, legal provisions of $74 million and favourable movements of $75 million related to the fair value accounting of commodity derivatives. As part of Shell’s normal business, commodity derivative hedge contracts are entered into for mitigation of economic exposures on future purchases, sales and inventory.

Adjusted Earnings and Adjusted EBITDA2 were driven by the same factors as the segment earnings and adjusted for identified items. In the first nine months 2024, Chemicals had negative Adjusted Earnings of $174 million and Products had positive Adjusted Earnings of $3,337 million.

Cash flow from operating activities for the first nine months 2024 was primarily driven by Adjusted EBITDA, the timing impact of payments relating to emission certificates and biofuel programmes of $257 million, and dividends (net of profits) from joint ventures and associates of $165 million. These inflows were partly offset by working capital outflows of $869 million, cash outflows relating to legal provisions of $203 million, tax payments of $182 million, and non-cash cost of supplies adjustment of $182 million.

Chemicals manufacturing plant utilisation was 77% compared with 70% in the first nine months 2023, mainly due to economic optimisation in the first nine months 2023. The increase was also driven by ramp-up of Shell Polymers Monaca and lower unplanned maintenance in the first nine months 2024.

Refinery utilisation was 88% compared with 87% in the first nine months 2023.

1.All earnings amounts are shown post-tax, unless stated otherwise.

2.Adjusted EBITDA is without taxation.

Page 10



SHELL PLC 3rd QUARTER 2024 UNAUDITED RESULTS



RENEWABLES AND ENERGY SOLUTIONS
Quarters				$ million		Nine months
Q3 2024	Q2 2024	Q3 2023	%¹		Reference	2024	2023	%
(481)	(75)	616	-538	Segment earnings		(3)	3,361	-100
(319)	112	667		Of which: Identified items	A	183	2,778
(162)	(187)	(51)	+13	Adjusted Earnings	A	(186)	583	-132
(75)	(91)	101	+18	Adjusted EBITDA	A	101	1,229	-92
(364)	847	(34)	-143	Cash flow from operating activities	A	2,948	4,249	-31
409	425	659		Cash capital expenditure	C	1,272	1,655
79	74	76	+7	External power sales (terawatt hours)2		230	211	+9
148	148	170	0	Sales of pipeline gas to end-use customers (terawatt hours)3		487	563	-14

1.Q3 on Q2 change

2.Physical power sales to third parties; excluding financial trades and physical trade with brokers, investors, financial institutions, trading platforms, and wholesale traders.

3.Physical natural gas sales to third parties; excluding financial trades and physical trade with brokers, investors, financial institutions, trading platforms, and wholesale traders. Excluding sales of natural gas by other segments and LNG sales.

Renewables and Energy Solutions includes activities such as renewable power generation, the marketing and trading and optimisation of power and pipeline gas, as well as carbon credits, and digitally enabled customer solutions. It also includes the production and marketing of hydrogen, development of commercial carbon capture and storage hubs, investment in nature-based projects that avoid or reduce carbon emissions, and Shell Ventures, which invests in companies that work to accelerate the energy and mobility transformation.

Quarter Analysis1

Segment earnings, compared with the second quarter 2024, reflected lower margins (decrease of $86 million) mainly due to lower trading and optimisation in the Americas, partly offset by slightly higher trading and optimisation in Europe.

Third quarter 2024 segment earnings also included unfavourable movements of $279 million relating to an accounting mismatch due to fair value accounting of commodity derivatives. These unfavourable movements are part of identified items and compare with the second quarter 2024 which included favourable movements of $223 million due to the fair value accounting of commodity derivatives and impairment charges of $155 million. As part of Shell’s normal business, commodity derivative hedge contracts are entered into for mitigation of economic exposures on future purchases, sales and inventory.

Adjusted Earnings and Adjusted EBITDA2 were driven by the same factors as the segment earnings and adjusted for identified items.

Cash flow from operating activities for the quarter was primarily driven by working capital outflows of $136 million, net cash outflows related to derivatives of $107 million, and Adjusted EBITDA.

Nine Months Analysis1

Segment earnings, compared with the first nine months 2023, reflected lower margins (decrease of $1,236 million) mainly from trading and optimisation primarily in Europe due to lower volatility and lower prices, partly offset by lower operating expenses (decrease of $427 million).

First nine months 2024 segment earnings also included favourable movements of $250 million relating to an accounting mismatch due to fair value accounting of commodity derivatives, partly offset by net impairment charges and reversals of $89 million. These favourable movements and charges are part of identified items and compare with the first nine months 2023 which included favourable movements of $2,632 million due to the fair value accounting of commodity derivatives. As part of Shell’s normal business, commodity derivative hedge contracts are entered into for mitigation of economic exposures on future purchases, sales and inventory.

Adjusted Earnings and Adjusted EBITDA2 were driven by the same factors as the segment earnings and adjusted for identified items. Most Renewables and Energy Solutions activities were loss-making for the first nine months 2024, which was partly offset by positive Adjusted Earnings from trading and optimisation.

Cash flow from operating activities for the first nine months 2024 was primarily driven by net cash inflows related to derivatives of $2,479 million, working capital inflows of $570 million, and Adjusted EBITDA, partly offset by tax payments of $415 million.

1.All earnings amounts are shown post-tax, unless stated otherwise.

Page 11



SHELL PLC 3rd QUARTER 2024 UNAUDITED RESULTS

2.Adjusted EBITDA is without taxation.

Additional Growth Measures


Quarters					Nine months
Q3 2024	Q2 2024	Q3 2023	%¹		2024	2023	%
				Renewable power generation capacity (gigawatt):
3.4	3.3	2.5	+2	– In operation2	3.4	2.5	+37
3.9	3.8	4.9	+3	– Under construction and/or committed for sale3	3.9	4.9	-20

1.Q3 on Q2 change

2.Shell’s equity share of renewable generation capacity post commercial operation date. It excludes Shell’s equity share of associates where information cannot be obtained.

3.Shell’s equity share of renewable generation capacity under construction and/or committed for sale under long-term offtake agreements (PPA). It excludes Shell’s equity share of associates where information cannot be obtained.



CORPORATE
Quarters			$ million		Nine months
Q3 2024	Q2 2024	Q3 2023		Reference	2024	2023
(647)	(1,656)	(497)	Segment earnings1		(2,656)	(2,315)
(3)	(1,080)	22	Of which: Identified items	A	(1,069)	(50)
(643)	(576)	(519)	Adjusted Earnings1	A	(1,588)	(2,266)
(346)	(213)	(186)	Adjusted EBITDA1	A	(650)	(619)
115	(1,468)	(238)	Cash flow from operating activities	A	(1,898)	(2,372)

1.From the first quarter 2024, Shell’s longer-term innovation portfolio is managed centrally and hence reported as part of the Corporate segment (previously all other segments). Prior period comparatives have been revised to conform with current year presentation with an offsetting impact on all the other segments.

The Corporate segment covers the non-operating activities supporting Shell. It comprises Shell’s holdings and treasury organisation, headquarters and central functions, self-insurance activities and centrally managed longer-term innovation portfolio. All finance expense, income and related taxes are included in Corporate segment earnings rather than in the earnings of business segments.

Quarter Analysis1

Segment earnings, compared with the second quarter 2024, reflected unfavourable movements in currency exchange rate effects, partly offset by favourable tax movements.

Second quarter 2024 segment earnings also included reclassifications from equity to profit and loss of cumulative currency translation differences related to funding structures resulting in unfavourable movements of $1,122 million. These currency translation differences were previously recognised in other comprehensive income and accumulated in equity as part of accumulated other comprehensive income. This non-cash reclassification is part of identified items.

Adjusted EBITDA2 was mainly driven by unfavourable currency exchange rate effects and higher operating expenses.

Nine Months Analysis1

Segment earnings, compared with the first nine months 2023, were primarily driven by favourable tax movements and favourable net interest movements.

First nine months 2024 segment earnings also included reclassifications from equity to profit and loss of cumulative currency translation differences related to funding structures resulting in unfavourable movements of $1,122 million. These reclassifications are included in identified items.

Adjusted EBITDA2 was mainly driven by unfavourable currency exchange rate effects.

1.All earnings amounts are shown post-tax, unless stated otherwise.

2.Adjusted EBITDA is without taxation.

OUTLOOK FOR THE FOURTH QUARTER 2024

For Full year 2023 cash capital expenditure was $24 billion. Cash capital expenditure for full year 2024 is expected to be below $22 billion.

Integrated Gas production is expected to be approximately 900 – 960 thousand boe/d. Fourth quarter 2024 outlook reflects scheduled maintenance at Pearl GTL in Qatar. LNG liquefaction volumes are expected to be approximately 6.9 – 7.5 million tonnes.

Page 12



SHELL PLC 3rd QUARTER 2024 UNAUDITED RESULTS

Upstream production is expected to be approximately 1,750 – 1,950 thousand boe/d.

Marketing sales volumes are expected to be approximately 2,550 – 3,050 thousand b/d.

Refinery utilisation is expected to be approximately 75% – 83%. Chemicals manufacturing plant utilisation is expected to be approximately 72% – 80%.

In the fourth quarter 2023, Corporate Adjusted Earnings were a net expense of $609 million1. Corporate Adjusted Earnings2 are expected to be a net expense of approximately $600 – $800 million in the fourth quarter 2024.

2.For the definition of Adjusted Earnings and the most comparable GAAP measure please see reference A.

FORTHCOMING EVENTS



Date			Event
January 30, 2025			Fourth quarter 2024 results and dividends
March 13, 2025			Publication of Annual Report and Accounts and filing of Form 20-F for the year ended December 31, 2024
May 2, 2025			First quarter 2025 results and dividends
July 31, 2025			Second quarter 2025 results and dividends
October 30, 2025			Third quarter 2025 results and dividends

Page 13



SHELL PLC 3rd QUARTER 2024 UNAUDITED RESULTS

UNAUDITED CONDENSED CONSOLIDATED INTERIM FINANCIAL STATEMENTS



CONSOLIDATED STATEMENT OF INCOME
Quarters			$ million	Nine months
Q3 2024	Q2 2024	Q3 2023		2024	2023
71,089	74,463	76,350	Revenue1	218,031	237,888
933	898	747	Share of profit/(loss) of joint ventures and associates	3,150	2,957
440	(305)	913	Interest and other income/(expenses)2	1,042	2,207
72,462	75,057	78,011	Total revenue and other income/(expenses)	222,222	243,052
48,225	49,417	49,144	Purchases	144,509	158,138
6,138	5,593	6,384	Production and manufacturing expenses	17,541	18,433
3,139	3,094	3,447	Selling, distribution and administrative expenses	9,208	9,811
294	263	267	Research and development	768	817
305	496	436	Exploration	1,551	1,283
5,916	7,555	5,911	Depreciation, depletion and amortisation2	19,352	20,069
1,174	1,235	1,131	Interest expense	3,573	3,507
65,190	67,653	66,720	Total expenditure	196,502	212,058
7,270	7,404	11,291	Income/(loss) before taxation	25,717	30,993
2,879	3,754	4,115	Taxation charge/(credit)2	10,237	11,891
4,391	3,650	7,176	Income/(loss) for the period	15,480	19,102
100	133	132	Income/(loss) attributable to non-controlling interest	314	215
4,291	3,517	7,044	Income/(loss) attributable to Shell plc shareholders	15,166	18,887
0.69	0.55	1.06	Basic earnings per share ($)3	2.39	2.78
0.68	0.55	1.05	Diluted earnings per share ($)3	2.36	2.75

1.See Note 2 “Segment information”.

2.See Note 8 “Other notes to the unaudited Condensed Consolidated Interim Financial Statements”.

3.See Note 4 “Earnings per share”.



CONSOLIDATED STATEMENT OF COMPREHENSIVE INCOME
Quarters			$ million	Nine months
Q3 2024	Q2 2024	Q3 2023		2024	2023
4,391	3,650	7,176	Income/(loss) for the period	15,480	19,102
			Other comprehensive income/(loss) net of tax:
			Items that may be reclassified to income in later periods:
2,947	698	(1,460)	– Currency translation differences1	1,651	(1,174)
35	(12)	1	– Debt instruments remeasurements	16	13
(75)	14	141	– Cash flow hedging gains/(losses)	(7)	61
—	—	—	– Net investment hedging gains/(losses)	—	(44)
(2)	(6)	(39)	– Deferred cost of hedging	(22)	(94)
35	(50)	(72)	– Share of other comprehensive income/(loss) of joint ventures and associates	(27)	(118)
2,940	644	(1,429)	Total	1,610	(1,357)
			Items that are not reclassified to income in later periods:
419	310	180	– Retirement benefits remeasurements	1,169	125
80	(81)	(38)	– Equity instruments remeasurements	77	(15)
(53)	44	17	– Share of other comprehensive income/(loss) of joint ventures and associates	1	(15)
446	273	159	Total	1,247	95
3,386	917	(1,270)	Other comprehensive income/(loss) for the period	2,857	(1,262)
7,777	4,567	5,906	Comprehensive income/(loss) for the period	18,337	17,840
177	123	149	Comprehensive income/(loss) attributable to non-controlling interest	357	217
7,600	4,443	5,757	Comprehensive income/(loss) attributable to Shell plc shareholders	17,981	17,622

1.See Note 8 “Other notes to the unaudited Condensed Consolidated Interim Financial Statements”.

Page 14



SHELL PLC 3rd QUARTER 2024 UNAUDITED RESULTS



CONDENSED CONSOLIDATED BALANCE SHEET
$ million
	September 30, 2024	December 31, 2023
Assets
Non-current assets
Goodwill	16,600	16,660
Other intangible assets	8,188	10,253
Property, plant and equipment	191,721	194,835
Joint ventures and associates	25,764	24,457
Investments in securities	3,062	3,246
Deferred tax	6,114	6,454
Retirement benefits1	10,564	9,151
Trade and other receivables	6,883	6,298
Derivative financial instruments²	498	801
	269,394	272,155
Current assets
Inventories	24,143	26,019
Trade and other receivables	46,782	53,273
Derivative financial instruments²	10,233	15,098
Cash and cash equivalents	42,252	38,774
	123,411	133,164
Assets classified as held for sale1	2,144	951
	125,555	134,115
Total assets	394,949	406,270
Liabilities
Non-current liabilities
Debt	64,597	71,610
Trade and other payables	3,864	3,103
Derivative financial instruments²	1,749	2,301
Deferred tax	15,487	15,347
Retirement benefits1	7,110	7,549
Decommissioning and other provisions	22,979	22,531
	115,786	122,441
Current liabilities
Debt	12,015	9,931
Trade and other payables	61,076	68,237
Derivative financial instruments²	6,775	9,529
Income taxes payable	4,289	3,422
Decommissioning and other provisions	4,171	4,041
	88,327	95,160
Liabilities directly associated with assets classified as held for sale1	1,298	307
	89,625	95,467
Total liabilities	205,411	217,908
Equity attributable to Shell plc shareholders	187,673	186,607
Non-controlling interest	1,865	1,755
Total equity	189,538	188,362
Total liabilities and equity	394,949	406,270

1. See Note 8 “Other notes to the unaudited Condensed Consolidated Interim Financial Statements”.

2. See Note 7 “Derivative financial instruments and debt excluding lease liabilities”.

Page 15



SHELL PLC 3rd QUARTER 2024 UNAUDITED RESULTS



CONSOLIDATED STATEMENT OF CHANGES IN EQUITY
	Equity attributable to Shell plc shareholders
$ million	Share capital1	Shares held in trust	Other reserves²	Retained earnings	Total	Non-controlling interest	Total equity
At January 1, 2024	544	(997)	21,145	165,915	186,607	1,755	188,362
Comprehensive income/(loss) for the period	—	—	2,815	15,166	17,981	357	18,337
Transfer from other comprehensive income	—	—	166	(166)	—	—	—
Dividends³	—	—	—	(6,556)	(6,556)	(242)	(6,798)
Repurchases of shares4	(25)	—	25	(10,536)	(10,536)	—	(10,536)
Share-based compensation	—	542	(24)	(400)	119	—	119
Other changes	—	—	—	60	60	(5)	55
At September 30, 2024	519	(456)	24,127	163,482	187,673	1,865	189,538
At January 1, 2023	584	(726)	21,132	169,482	190,472	2,125	192,597
Comprehensive income/(loss) for the period	—	—	(1,263)	18,886	17,622	217	17,840
Transfer from other comprehensive income	—	—	(111)	111	—	—	—
Dividends3	—	—	—	(6,193)	(6,193)	(636)	(6,829)
Repurchases of shares4	(30)	—	30	(11,058)	(11,058)	—	(11,058)
Share-based compensation	—	466	(18)	(100)	349	—	349
Other changes	—	—	—	8	8	37	45
At September 30, 2023	555	(261)	19,769	171,136	191,199	1,745	192,943

1. See Note 5 “Share capital”.

2. See Note 6 “Other reserves”.

3. The amount charged to retained earnings is based on prevailing exchange rates on payment date.

4. Includes shares committed to repurchase under an irrevocable contract and repurchases subject to settlement at the end of the quarter.

Page 16



SHELL PLC 3rd QUARTER 2024 UNAUDITED RESULTS



CONSOLIDATED STATEMENT OF CASH FLOWS
Quarters			$ million	Nine months
Q3 2024	Q2 2024	Q3 2023		2024	2023
7,270	7,404	11,291	Income before taxation for the period	25,717	30,993
			Adjustment for:
554	619	513	– Interest expense (net)	1,749	1,789
5,916	7,555	5,911	– Depreciation, depletion and amortisation1	19,352	20,069
150	269	186	– Exploration well write-offs	973	626
154	(143)	74	– Net (gains)/losses on sale and revaluation of non-current assets and businesses	—	(24)
(933)	(898)	(747)	– Share of (profit)/loss of joint ventures and associates	(3,150)	(2,957)
860	792	749	– Dividends received from joint ventures and associates	2,390	2,529
2,705	(954)	(3,151)	– (Increase)/decrease in inventories	1,143	2,237
4,057	1,965	(1,126)	– (Increase)/decrease in current receivables	5,827	13,105
(4,096)	(1,269)	4,498	– Increase/(decrease) in current payables2	(7,314)	(10,881)
735	253	(2,807)	– Derivative financial instruments	2,373	(6,050)
125	(332)	1	– Retirement benefits	(267)	31
359	(332)	282	– Decommissioning and other provisions2	(572)	(210)
(144)	2,027	(150)	– Other1	2,392	474
(3,028)	(3,448)	(3,191)	Tax paid	(9,092)	(10,108)
14,684	13,508	12,332	Cash flow from operating activities	41,522	41,622
(4,690)	(4,445)	(5,259)	Capital expenditure	(13,114)	(16,033)
(222)	(261)	(350)	Investments in joint ventures and associates	(983)	(1,093)
(38)	(13)	(40)	Investments in equity securities	(63)	(154)
(4,950)	(4,719)	(5,649)	Cash capital expenditure	(14,161)	(17,280)
94	710	184	Proceeds from sale of property, plant and equipment and businesses	1,128	2,024
94	57	68	Proceeds from joint ventures and associates from sale, capital reduction and repayment of long-term loans	284	425
6	2	7	Proceeds from sale of equity securities	576	28
593	648	586	Interest received	1,818	1,555
1,074	883	701	Other investing cash inflows	2,814	3,308
(769)	(920)	(724)	Other investing cash outflows	(3,183)	(2,141)
(3,857)	(3,338)	(4,827)	Cash flow from investing activities	(10,723)	(12,080)
(89)	(179)	88	Net increase/(decrease) in debt with maturity period within three months	(375)	(185)
			Other debt:
78	132	187	– New borrowings	377	964
(1,322)	(4,154)	(3,368)	– Repayments	(7,008)	(6,596)
(979)	(1,287)	(1,049)	Interest paid	(3,177)	(3,076)
652	(115)	(26)	Derivative financial instruments	239	22
—	(1)	6	Change in non-controlling interest	(5)	(22)
			Cash dividends paid to:
(2,167)	(2,177)	(2,179)	– Shell plc shareholders	(6,554)	(6,192)
(92)	(82)	(51)	– Non-controlling interest	(242)	(636)
(3,537)	(3,958)	(2,725)	Repurchases of shares	(10,319)	(10,640)
6	(24)	(30)	Shares held in trust: net sales/(purchases) and dividends received	(480)	(176)
(7,452)	(11,846)	(9,147)	Cash flow from financing activities	(27,545)	(26,535)
729	(126)	(421)	Effects of exchange rate changes on cash and cash equivalents	224	(222)
4,105	(1,801)	(2,063)	Increase/(decrease) in cash and cash equivalents	3,478	2,785
38,148	39,949	45,094	Cash and cash equivalents at beginning of period	38,774	40,246
42,252	38,148	43,031	Cash and cash equivalents at end of period	42,252	43,031

1.See Note 8 “Other notes to the unaudited Condensed Consolidated Interim Financial Statements”.

2.To further enhance consistency between working capital and the Balance Sheet and the Statement of Cash Flows, from January 1, 2024, onwards movements in current other provisions are recognised in ‘Decommissioning and other provisions’ instead of ‘Increase/(decrease) in current payables’. Comparatives for the third quarter 2023 and the nine months 2023 have been reclassified accordingly by $212 million and $40 million respectively to conform with current period presentation.

Page 17



SHELL PLC 3rd QUARTER 2024 UNAUDITED RESULTS

NOTES TO THE UNAUDITED CONDENSED CONSOLIDATED INTERIM FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

1. Basis of preparation

These unaudited Condensed Consolidated Interim Financial Statements of Shell plc (“the Company”) and its subsidiaries (collectively referred to as “Shell”) have been prepared in accordance with IAS 34 Interim Financial Reporting as issued by the International Accounting Standards Board (“IASB”) and adopted by the UK, and on the basis of the same accounting principles as those used in the Company’s Annual Report and Accounts (pages 244 to 316) for the year ended December 31, 2023, as filed with the Registrar of Companies for England and Wales and as filed with the Autoriteit Financiële Markten (the Netherlands) and Form 20-F (pages 217 to 290) for the year ended December 31, 2023 as filed with the US Securities and Exchange Commission, and should be read in conjunction with these filings.

The financial information presented in the unaudited Condensed Consolidated Interim Financial Statements does not constitute statutory accounts within the meaning of section 434(3) of the Companies Act 2006 (“the Act”). Statutory accounts for the year ended December 31, 2023, were published in Shell’s Annual Report and Accounts, a copy of which was delivered to the Registrar of Companies for England and Wales, and in Shell’s Form 20-F. The auditor’s report on those accounts was unqualified, did not include a reference to any matters to which the auditor drew attention by way of emphasis without qualifying the report and did not contain a statement under sections 498(2) or 498(3) of the Act.

2. Segment information

Segment earnings are presented on a current cost of supplies basis (CCS earnings), which is the earnings measure used by the Chief Executive Officer for the purposes of making decisions about allocating resources and assessing performance. On this basis, the purchase price of volumes sold during the period is based on the current cost of supplies during the same period after making allowance for the tax effect. CCS earnings therefore exclude the effect of changes in the oil price on inventory carrying amounts. Sales between segments are based on prices generally equivalent to commercially available prices.

From the first quarter 2024, Wholesale commercial fuels forms part of Mobility with inclusion in the Marketing segment (previously Chemicals and Products segment). The change in segmentation reflects the increasing alignment between the economic characteristics of wholesale commercial fuels and other Mobility businesses, and is consistent with changes in the information provided to the Chief Operating Decision Maker. Prior period comparatives have been revised to conform with current year presentation with an offsetting impact between the Marketing and the Chemicals and Products segment (see below). Also, from the first quarter 2024, Shell’s longer-term innovation portfolio is managed centrally and hence reported as part of the Corporate segment (previously all other segments). Prior period comparatives have been revised to conform with current year presentation with an offsetting impact on all the other segments (see below).

Page 18



SHELL PLC 3rd QUARTER 2024 UNAUDITED RESULTS



REVENUE AND CCS EARNINGS BY SEGMENT
Quarters			$ million	Nine months
Q3 2024	Q2 2024	Q3 2023		2024	2023
			Third-party revenue
9,748	9,052	8,338	Integrated Gas	27,996	27,208
1,605	1,590	1,617	Upstream	4,954	5,212
30,519	32,005	35,236	Marketing2	92,564	98,799
22,608	24,583	22,119	Chemicals and Products2	70,926	72,121
6,599	7,222	9,032	Renewables and Energy Solutions	21,558	34,517
10	11	7	Corporate	33	31
71,089	74,463	76,350	Total third-party revenue1	218,031	237,888
			Inter-segment revenue
2,131	2,157	2,472	Integrated Gas	6,691	8,946
9,618	10,102	10,277	Upstream	30,008	30,282
1,235	1,363	1,456	Marketing2	3,953	4,056
9,564	9,849	11,942	Chemicals and Products2	29,725	32,653
1,131	957	894	Renewables and Energy Solutions	3,093	3,140
—	—	—	Corporate	—	—
			CCS earnings
2,631	2,454	2,156	Integrated Gas	7,846	5,325
2,289	2,179	1,999	Upstream	6,741	6,388
760	257	629	Marketing2	1,791	2,832
341	587	1,250	Chemicals and Products2	2,085	3,310
(481)	(75)	616	Renewables and Energy Solutions	(3)	3,361
(647)	(1,656)	(497)	Corporate3	(2,656)	(2,315)
4,894	3,747	6,152	Total CCS earnings4	15,804	18,901

1.Includes revenue from sources other than from contracts with customers, which mainly comprises the impact of fair value accounting of commodity derivatives.

2.From January 1, 2024, onwards Wholesale commercial fuels has been reallocated from the Chemicals and Products segment to the Marketing segment. Comparatives for the third quarter 2023 and the nine months 2023 have been reclassified accordingly, by $5,659 million and $16,369 million respectively for Third-party revenue and by $(73) million and $22 million respectively for CCS earnings to conform with current period presentation. For Inter-segment revenue the reallocation and revision of comparative figures for the third quarter 2023 and the nine months 2023 led to an increase in inter-segment revenue in the Marketing segment of $1,302 million and $3,616 million respectively and an increase in the Chemicals and Products segment of $11,373 million and $31,011 million respectively.

3.From January 1, 2024, onwards costs for Shell’s centrally managed longer-term innovation portfolio are reported as part of the Corporate segment. Prior period comparatives for Corporate for the third quarter 2023 and the nine months 2023 have been revised by $37 million and $91 million respectively, with a net offsetting impact in all other segments to conform with current period presentation.

4.See Note 3 “Reconciliation of income for the period to CCS Earnings, Operating expenses and Total Debt”.

Page 19



SHELL PLC 3rd QUARTER 2024 UNAUDITED RESULTS

Cash capital expenditure is a measure used by the Chief Executive Officer for the purposes of making decisions about allocating resources and assessing performance.



CASH CAPITAL EXPENDITURE BY SEGMENT
Quarters			$ million	Nine months
Q3 2024	Q2 2024	Q3 2023		2024	2023
			Capital expenditure
1,090	1,024	958	Integrated Gas	2,971	2,458
1,998	1,769	2,013	Upstream	5,533	5,701
488	644	935	Marketing1	1,559	4,358
748	601	761	Chemicals and Products1	1,822	1,944
327	377	523	Renewables and Energy Solutions	1,124	1,382
39	30	68	Corporate	104	190
4,690	4,445	5,259	Total capital expenditure	13,114	16,033
			Add: Investments in joint ventures and associates
147	127	141	Integrated Gas	457	543
(37)	60	(6)	Upstream	268	205
37	—	25	Marketing	75	48
13	37	76	Chemicals and Products	76	81
59	35	114	Renewables and Energy Solutions	103	205
3	1	1	Corporate	5	11
222	261	350	Total investments in joint ventures and associates	983	1,093
			Add: Investments in equity securities
—	—	—	Integrated Gas	—	—
12	—	—	Upstream	12	—
—	—	—	Marketing	—	—
—	—	—	Chemicals and Products	—	2
23	13	21	Renewables and Energy Solutions	45	68
3	—	19	Corporate	6	84
38	13	40	Total investments in equity securities	63	154
			Cash capital expenditure
1,236	1,151	1,099	Integrated Gas	3,429	3,000
1,974	1,829	2,007	Upstream	5,813	5,906
525	644	959	Marketing1	1,634	4,406
761	638	837	Chemicals and Products1	1,898	2,027
409	425	659	Renewables and Energy Solutions	1,272	1,655
45	32	87	Corporate	114	285
4,950	4,719	5,649	Total Cash capital expenditure	14,161	17,280

1.From January 1, 2024, onwards Wholesale commercial fuels has been reallocated from the Chemicals and Products segment to the Marketing segment. Comparatives for the third quarter 2023 and the nine months 2023 have been reclassified accordingly by $42 million and $133 million respectively for capital expenditure and cash capital expenditure to conform with current period presentation.

Page 20



SHELL PLC 3rd QUARTER 2024 UNAUDITED RESULTS

3. Reconciliation of income for the period to CCS Earnings, Operating expenses and Total Debt



RECONCILIATION OF INCOME FOR THE PERIOD TO CCS EARNINGS
Quarters			$ million	Nine months
Q3 2024	Q2 2024	Q3 2023		2024	2023
4,291	3,517	7,044	Income/(loss) attributable to Shell plc shareholders	15,166	18,887
100	133	132	Income/(loss) attributable to non-controlling interest	314	215
4,391	3,650	7,176	Income/(loss) for the period	15,480	19,102
			Current cost of supplies adjustment:
668	137	(1,304)	Purchases	473	(275)
(162)	(36)	327	Taxation	(114)	60
(2)	(5)	(47)	Share of profit/(loss) of joint ventures and associates	(35)	14
503	97	(1,024)	Current cost of supplies adjustment	324	(201)
			Of which:
477	89	(969)	Attributable to Shell plc shareholders	302	(162)
26	7	(55)	Attributable to non-controlling interest	22	(39)
4,894	3,747	6,152	CCS earnings	15,804	18,901
			Of which:
4,768	3,606	6,075	CCS earnings attributable to Shell plc shareholders	15,468	18,725
126	140	77	CCS earnings attributable to non-controlling interest	336	176



RECONCILIATION OF OPERATING EXPENSES
Quarters			$ million	Nine months
Q3 2024	Q2 2024	Q3 2023		2024	2023
6,138	5,593	6,384	Production and manufacturing expenses	17,541	18,433
3,139	3,094	3,447	Selling, distribution and administrative expenses	9,208	9,811
294	263	267	Research and development	768	817
9,570	8,950	10,097	Operating expenses	27,517	29,062

RECONCILIATION OF TOTAL DEBT

Quarters

$ million

Nine months

Q3 2024

Q2 2024

Q3 2023

2024

2023

September 30, 2024

June 30, 2024

September 30, 2023

September 30, 2024

September 30, 2023

12,015

10,849

10,119

Current debt

12,015

10,119

64,597

64,619

72,028

Non-current debt

64,597

72,028

76,613

75,468

82,147

Total debt

76,613

82,147

4. Earnings per share



EARNINGS PER SHARE
Quarters				Nine months
Q3 2024	Q2 2024	Q3 2023		2024	2023
4,291	3,517	7,044	Income/(loss) attributable to Shell plc shareholders ($ million)	15,166	18,887

			Weighted average number of shares used as the basis for determining:
6,256.5	6,355.4	6,668.1	Basic earnings per share (million)	6,350.3	6,792.5
6,320.9	6,417.6	6,736.7	Diluted earnings per share (million)	6,414.0	6,856.7

Page 21



SHELL PLC 3rd QUARTER 2024 UNAUDITED RESULTS

5. Share capital

ISSUED AND FULLY PAID ORDINARY SHARES OF €0.07 EACH

Number of shares

Nominal value
($ million)

At January 1, 2024

6,524,109,049

544

Repurchases of shares

(299,830,201)

(25)

At September 30, 2024

6,224,278,848

519

At January 1, 2023

7,003,503,393

584

Repurchases of shares

(357,368,014)

(30)

At September 30, 2023

6,646,135,379

555

At Shell plc’s Annual General Meeting on May 21, 2024, the Board was authorised to allot ordinary shares in Shell plc, and to grant rights to subscribe for, or to convert, any security into ordinary shares in Shell plc, up to an aggregate nominal amount of approximately €150 million (representing approximately 2,147 million ordinary shares of €0.07 each), and to list such shares or rights on any stock exchange. This authority expires at the earlier of the close of business on August 20, 2025, or the end of the Annual General Meeting to be held in 2025, unless previously renewed, revoked or varied by Shell plc in a general meeting.

6. Other reserves



OTHER RESERVES
$ million	Merger reserve	Share premium reserve	Capital redemption reserve	Share plan reserve	Accumulated other comprehensive income	Total
At January 1, 2024	37,298	154	236	1,308	(17,851)	21,145
Other comprehensive income/(loss) attributable to Shell plc shareholders	—	—	—	—	2,815	2,815
Transfer from other comprehensive income	—	—	—	—	166	166
Repurchases of shares	—	—	25	—	—	25
Share-based compensation	—	—	—	(24)	—	(24)
At September 30, 2024	37,298	154	261	1,284	(14,870)	24,127
At January 1, 2023	37,298	154	196	1,140	(17,656)	21,132
Other comprehensive income/(loss) attributable to Shell plc shareholders	—	—	—	—	(1,263)	(1,263)
Transfer from other comprehensive income	—	—	—	—	(111)	(111)
Repurchases of shares	—	—	30	—	—	30
Share-based compensation	—	—	—	(18)	—	(18)
At September 30, 2023	37,298	154	227	1,121	(19,029)	19,769

The merger reserve and share premium reserve were established as a consequence of Shell plc (formerly Royal Dutch Shell plc) becoming the single parent company of Royal Dutch Petroleum Company and The “Shell” Transport and Trading Company, p.l.c., now The Shell Transport and Trading Company Limited, in 2005. The merger reserve increased in 2016 following the issuance of shares for the acquisition of BG Group plc. The capital redemption reserve was established in connection with repurchases of shares of Shell plc. The share plan reserve is in respect of equity-settled share-based compensation plans.

7. Derivative financial instruments and debt excluding lease liabilities

As disclosed in the Consolidated Financial Statements for the year ended December 31, 2023, presented in the Annual Report and Accounts and Form 20-F for that year, Shell is exposed to the risks of changes in fair value of its financial assets and liabilities. The fair values of the financial assets and liabilities are defined as the price that would be received to sell an asset or paid to transfer a liability in an orderly transaction between market participants at the measurement date. Methods and assumptions used to estimate the fair values at September 30, 2024, are consistent with those used in the year ended December 31, 2023, though the carrying amounts of derivative financial instruments have changed since that

Page 22



SHELL PLC 3rd QUARTER 2024 UNAUDITED RESULTS

date. The movement of the derivative financial instruments between December 31, 2023 and September 30, 2024 is a decrease of $4,865 million for the current assets and a decrease of $2,754 million for the current liabilities.

The table below provides the comparison of the fair value with the carrying amount of debt excluding lease liabilities, disclosed in accordance with IFRS 7 Financial Instruments: Disclosures.



DEBT EXCLUDING LEASE LIABILITIES
$ million	September 30, 2024	December 31, 2023
Carrying amount	51,022	53,832
Fair value¹	48,489	50,866

1. Mainly determined from the prices quoted for these securities.

8. Other notes to the unaudited Condensed Consolidated Interim Financial Statements

Consolidated Statement of Income

Interest and other income



Quarters			$ million	Nine months
Q3 2024	Q2 2024	Q3 2023		2024	2023
440	(305)	913	Interest and other income/(expenses)	1,042	2,207
			Of which:
619	616	618	Interest income	1,824	1,718
4	30	7	Dividend income (from investments in equity securities)	58	36
(154)	143	(75)	Net gains/(losses) on sales and revaluation of non-current assets and businesses	0	35
(189)	(1,169)	168	Net foreign exchange gains/(losses) on financing activities	(1,292)	(60)
159	74	195	Other	452	478

Net foreign exchange gains/(losses) on financing activities in the second quarter 2024 includes a loss of $1,104 million related to cumulative currency translation differences that were reclassified to profit and loss. The reclassification of these cumulative currency translation differences was principally triggered by changes in the funding structure of some of Shell’s businesses in the United Kingdom. These currency translation differences were previously directly recognised in equity as part of accumulated other comprehensive income.

Depreciation, depletion and amortisation



Quarters			$ million	Nine months
Q3 2024	Q2 2024	Q3 2023		2024	2023
5,916	7,555	5,911	Depreciation, depletion and amortisation	19,352	20,069
			Of which:
5,578	5,642	5,716	Depreciation	16,874	17,120
340	1,984	359	Impairments	2,706	3,438
(2)	(71)	(163)	Impairment reversals	(228)	(489)

Impairments recognised in the third quarter 2024 of $340 million pre-tax ($290 million post-tax) mainly relate to various assets in Marketing and Chemicals and Products. Impairments recognised in the second quarter 2024 of $1,984 million pre-tax ($1,778 million post-tax) mainly relate to Marketing ($1,055 million), Chemicals and Products ($690 million) and Renewables and Energy Solutions ($141 million). The impairment in Marketing principally relates to a biofuels facility located in the Netherlands, triggered by a temporary pause of on-site construction work. The impairment in Chemicals and Products relates to an Energy and Chemicals Park located in Singapore, due to remeasurement of the fair value less costs of disposal triggered by a sales agreement reached. Impairments recognised in the third quarter 2023 of $359 million pre-tax ($299 million post-tax) mainly relate to various assets in Renewables and Energy Solutions and Chemicals and Products.

Page 23



SHELL PLC 3rd QUARTER 2024 UNAUDITED RESULTS

Taxation charge/credit

Quarters

$ million

Nine months

Q3 2024

Q2 2024

Q3 2023

2024

2023

2,879

3,754

4,115

Taxation charge/(credit)

10,237

11,891

Of which:

2,834

3,666

4,115

Income tax excluding Pillar Two income tax

10,026

11,891

—

Income tax related to Pillar Two income tax

212

—

On June 20, 2023, the UK substantively enacted Pillar Two Model Rules, effective as from January 1, 2024.

As required by IAS 12 Income Taxes, Shell has applied the exception to recognising and disclosing information about deferred tax assets and liabilities related to Pillar Two income taxes.

Consolidated Statement of Comprehensive Income

Currency translation differences

Quarters

$ million

Nine months

Q3 2024

Q2 2024

Q3 2023

2024

2023

2,947

698

(1,460)

Currency translation differences

1,651

(1,174)

Of which:

2,912

(406)

(1,469)

Recognised in Other comprehensive income

524

(1,181)

1,104

(Gain)/loss reclassified to profit or loss

1,127

Amounts reclassified to profit and loss in the second quarter 2024 relate to cumulative currency translation differences that were reclassified to income (refer to Interest and other income above).

Condensed Consolidated Balance Sheet

Retirement benefits



$ million
	September 30, 2024	December 31, 2023
Non-current assets
Retirement benefits	10,564	9,151
Non-current liabilities
Retirement benefits	7,110	7,549
Surplus/(deficit)	3,454	1,602

Amounts recognised in the Balance Sheet in relation to defined benefit plans include both plan assets and obligations that are presented on a net basis on a plan-by-plan basis. The change in the net retirement benefit asset as at September 30, 2024, is mainly driven by an increase of the market yield on high-quality corporate bonds in the USA, the UK and Eurozone since December 31, 2023, partly offset by losses on plan assets.

Assets classified as held for sale



$ million
	September 30, 2024	December 31, 2023
Assets classified as held for sale	2,144	951
Liabilities directly associated with assets classified as held for sale	1,298	307

Assets classified as held for sale and associated liabilities at September 30, 2024 relate to an energy and chemicals park asset in Chemicals and Products in Singapore and various smaller assets. The major classes of assets and liabilities classified as held for sale at September 30, 2024, are Inventories ($1,273 million; December 31, 2023: $463 million), Property, plant and equipment ($544 million; December 31, 2023: $250 million), Decommissioning and other provisions ($634 million; December 31, 2023: $75 million) and Debt ($425 million; December 31, 2023: $84 million).

Page 24



SHELL PLC 3rd QUARTER 2024 UNAUDITED RESULTS

Consolidated Statement of Cash Flows

Cash flow from operating activities – Other

Quarters

$ million

Nine months

Q3 2024

Q2 2024

Q3 2023

2024

2023

(144)

2,027

(150)

Other

2,392

474

‘Cash flow from operating activities – Other’ for the third quarter 2024 includes $432 million of net inflows (second quarter 2024: $620 million net inflows; third quarter 2023: $630 million net outflows) due to the timing of payments relating to emission certificates and biofuel programmes in Europe and North America and $539 million in relation to reversal of currency exchange gains on Cash and cash equivalents (second quarter 2024: $96 million losses; third quarter 2023: $336 million losses). For the second quarter 2024 ‘Cash flow from operating activities – Other’ also includes $1,104 million inflow representing reversal of the non-cash recycling of currency translation losses from other comprehensive income (refer to Interest and other income above).

Page 25



SHELL PLC 3rd QUARTER 2024 UNAUDITED RESULTS

ALTERNATIVE PERFORMANCE (NON-GAAP) MEASURES

A.Adjusted Earnings, Adjusted earnings before interest, taxes, depreciation and amortisation (“Adjusted EBITDA”) and Cash flow from operating activities

The “Adjusted Earnings” measure aims to facilitate a comparative understanding of Shell’s financial performance from period to period by removing the effects of oil price changes on inventory carrying amounts and removing the effects of identified items. These items are in some cases driven by external factors and may, either individually or collectively, hinder the comparative understanding of Shell’s financial results from period to period. This measure excludes earnings attributable to non-controlling interest.

We define “Adjusted EBITDA” as “Income/(loss) for the period” adjusted for current cost of supplies; identified items; tax charge/(credit); depreciation, amortisation and depletion; exploration well write-offs and net interest expense. All items include the non-controlling interest component. Management uses this measure to evaluate Shell’s performance in the period and over time.



Quarters			$ million	Nine months
Q3 2024	Q2 2024	Q3 2023		2024	2023
4,291	3,517	7,044	Income/(loss) attributable to Shell plc shareholders	15,166	18,887
100	133	132	Income/(loss) attributable to non-controlling interest	314	215
477	89	(969)	Add: Current cost of supplies adjustment attributable to Shell plc shareholders	302	(162)
26	7	(55)	Add: Current cost of supplies adjustment attributable to non-controlling interest	22	(39)
4,894	3,747	6,152	CCS earnings	15,804	18,901



Q3 2024	$ million
	Total	Integrated Gas	Upstream	Marketing	Chemicals and Products	Renewables and Energy Solutions	Corporate
CCS earnings	4,894	2,631	2,289	760	341	(481)	(647)
Less: Identified items	(1,259)	(240)	(153)	(422)	(122)	(319)	(3)
Less: CCS earnings attributable to non-controlling interest	126
Add: Identified items attributable to non-controlling interest	—
Adjusted Earnings	6,028
Add: Non-controlling interest	126
Adjusted Earnings plus non-controlling interest	6,153	2,871	2,443	1,182	463	(162)	(643)
Add: Taxation charge/(credit) excluding tax impact of identified items	3,571	949	2,413	322	(73)	(1)	(39)
Add: Depreciation, depletion and amortisation excluding impairments	5,578	1,369	2,691	564	862	86	6
Add: Exploration well write-offs	150	2	148
Add: Interest expense excluding identified items	1,173	49	183	13	14	2	912
Less: Interest income	619	5	8	—	25	—	581
Adjusted EBITDA	16,005	5,234	7,871	2,081	1,240	(75)	(346)
Less: Current cost of supplies adjustment before taxation	665			334	331
Joint ventures and associates (dividends received less profit)	(62)	(146)	(90)	51	63	61	—
Derivative financial instruments	133	(373)	47	98	88	(106)	380
Taxation paid	(3,028)	(814)	(2,074)	(241)	23	(33)	112
Other	(365)	(32)	(406)	275	107	(75)	(234)
(Increase)/decrease in working capital	2,665	(247)	(78)	792	2,131	(136)	204
Cash flow from operating activities	14,684	3,623	5,268	2,722	3,321	(364)	115

Page 26



SHELL PLC 3rd QUARTER 2024 UNAUDITED RESULTS



Q2 2024	$ million
	Total	Integrated Gas	Upstream	Marketing	Chemicals and Products	Renewables and Energy Solutions	Corporate
CCS earnings	3,747	2,454	2,179	257	587	(75)	(1,656)
Less: Identified items	(2,669)	(220)	(157)	(825)	(499)	112	(1,080)
Less: CCS earnings attributable to non-controlling interest	140
Add: Identified items attributable to non-controlling interest	18
Adjusted Earnings	6,293
Add: Non-controlling interest	122
Adjusted Earnings plus non-controlling interest	6,415	2,675	2,336	1,082	1,085	(187)	(576)
Add: Taxation charge/(credit) excluding tax impact of identified items	3,947	940	2,312	359	297	(10)	49
Add: Depreciation, depletion and amortisation excluding impairments	5,642	1,375	2,750	548	867	95	6
Add: Exploration well write-offs	269	5	264	—	—	—	—
Add: Interest expense excluding identified items	1,149	44	166	10	23	1	904
Less: Interest income	616	—	(1)	—	30	(9)	595
Adjusted EBITDA	16,806	5,039	7,829	1,999	2,242	(91)	(213)
Less: Current cost of supplies adjustment before taxation	133			74	59
Joint ventures and associates (dividends received less profit)	(135)	96	(288)	(54)	46	64	—
Derivative financial instruments	713	(133)	9	7	304	607	(79)
Taxation paid	(3,448)	(1,039)	(1,955)	(17)	(186)	(138)	(113)
Other	(38)	(104)	(341)	(57)	263	180	20
(Increase)/decrease in working capital	(258)	324	484	153	(361)	225	(1,083)
Cash flow from operating activities	13,508	4,183	5,739	1,958	2,249	847	(1,468)



Q3 2023	$ million
	Total	Integrated Gas	Upstream	Marketing	Chemicals and Products	Renewables and Energy Solutions	Corporate
CCS earnings	6,152	2,156	1,999	629	1,250	616	(497)
Less: Identified items	(149)	(375)	(238)	(12)	(213)	667	22
Less: CCS earnings attributable to non-controlling interest	77
Add: Identified items attributable to non-controlling interest	—
Adjusted Earnings	6,224
Add: Non-controlling interest	77
Adjusted Earnings plus non-controlling interest	6,302	2,531	2,237	641	1,463	(51)	(519)
Add: Taxation charge/(credit) excluding tax impact of identified items	3,621	845	2,160	269	253	70	24
Add: Depreciation, depletion and amortisation excluding impairments	5,716	1,413	2,771	528	918	82	4
Add: Exploration well write-offs	186	35	151	—	—	—	—
Add: Interest expense excluding identified items	1,130	51	119	23	41	1	895
Less: Interest income	618	1	5	8	13	1	590
Adjusted EBITDA	16,336	4,874	7,433	1,453	2,661	101	(186)
Less: Current cost of supplies adjustment before taxation	(1,351)			(624)	(727)
Joint ventures and associates (dividends received less profit)	(13)	(40)	43	(19)	(19)	21	—
Derivative financial instruments	(2,549)	(454)	(20)	10	(375)	(1,407)	(304)
Taxation paid	(3,191)	(679)	(2,090)	(226)	54	(258)	8
Other	177	(44)	(57)	(485)	167	327	269
(Increase)/decrease in working capital	221	352	28	(960)	(354)	1,182	(27)
Cash flow from operating activities	12,332	4,009	5,336	397	2,862	(34)	(238)

Page 27



SHELL PLC 3rd QUARTER 2024 UNAUDITED RESULTS



Nine months 2024	$ million
	Total	Integrated Gas	Upstream	Marketing	Chemicals and Products	Renewables and Energy Solutions	Corporate
CCS earnings	15,804	7,846	6,741	1,791	2,085	(3)	(2,656)
Less: Identified items	(4,569)	(1,379)	28	(1,255)	(1,078)	183	(1,069)
Less: CCS earnings attributable to non-controlling interest	336
Add: Identified items attributable to non-controlling interest	18
Adjusted Earnings	20,055
Add: Non-controlling interest	318
Adjusted Earnings plus non-controlling interest	20,373	9,225	6,712	3,046	3,163	(186)	(1,588)
Add: Taxation charge/(credit) excluding tax impact of identified items	11,642	2,885	7,247	1,039	562	(10)	(81)
Add: Depreciation, depletion and amortisation excluding impairments	16,874	4,154	8,169	1,647	2,599	287	18
Add: Exploration well write-offs	973	14	959
Add: Interest expense excluding identified items	3,485	136	518	35	54	4	2,737
Less: Interest income	1,824	5	17	1	69	(5)	1,736
Adjusted EBITDA	51,523	16,410	23,588	5,767	6,308	101	(650)
Less: Current cost of supplies adjustment before taxation	438			256	182
Joint ventures and associates (dividends received less profit)	(779)	(247)	(924)	89	165	138	—
Derivative financial instruments	1,153	(1,586)	53	66	(10)	2,479	152
Taxation paid	(9,092)	(2,320)	(5,832)	(432)	(182)	(415)	89
Other	(500)	(90)	(978)	612	(8)	75	(111)
(Increase)/decrease in working capital	(344)	352	827	153	(869)	570	(1,377)
Cash flow from operating activities	41,522	12,518	16,734	5,999	5,221	2,948	(1,898)



Nine months 2023	$ million
	Total	Integrated Gas	Upstream	Marketing	Chemicals and Products	Renewables and Energy Solutions	Corporate
CCS earnings	18,901	5,325	6,388	2,832	3,310	3,361	(2,315)
Less: Identified items	(2,219)	(4,625)	(357)	314	(278)	2,778	(50)
Less: CCS earnings attributable to non-controlling interest	176
Add: Identified items attributable to non-controlling interest	—
Adjusted Earnings	20,944
Add: Non-controlling interest	176
Adjusted Earnings plus non-controlling interest	21,120	9,951	6,746	2,518	3,588	583	(2,266)
Add: Taxation charge/(credit) excluding tax impact of identified items	11,553	2,773	6,720	808	558	345	349
Add: Depreciation, depletion and amortisation excluding impairments	17,120	4,300	8,358	1,479	2,667	303	13
Add: Exploration well write-offs	625	59	566	—	—	—	—
Add: Interest expense excluding identified items	3,504	110	372	40	39	3	2,941
Less: Interest income	1,718	2	13	8	33	5	1,657
Adjusted EBITDA	52,204	17,189	22,750	4,837	6,819	1,229	(619)
Less: Current cost of supplies adjustment before taxation	(261)			(94)	(167)
Joint ventures and associates (dividends received less profit)	(167)	32	(443)	85	85	72	2
Derivative financial instruments	(5,112)	(3,071)	—	(18)	225	(1,719)	(528)
Taxation paid	(10,108)	(2,843)	(6,455)	(478)	(197)	(350)	214
Other	82	(84)	(530)	23	284	304	85
(Increase)/decrease in working capital	4,462	2,700	342	(748)	(1,019)	4,713	(1,526)
Cash flow from operating activities	41,622	13,923	15,663	3,794	6,364	4,249	(2,372)

Identified Items

Identified items comprise: divestment gains and losses, impairments, redundancy and restructuring, provisions for onerous contracts, fair value accounting of commodity derivatives and certain gas contracts and the impact of exchange rate movements and inflationary adjustments on certain deferred tax balances, and other items. Identified items in the tables below are presented on a net basis.

Page 28



SHELL PLC 3rd QUARTER 2024 UNAUDITED RESULTS



Q3 2024	$ million
	Total	Integrated Gas	Upstream	Marketing	Chemicals and Products	Renewables and Energy Solutions	Corporate
Identified items included in Income/(loss) before taxation
Divestment gains/(losses)	(154)	1	(2)	(110)	(19)	(20)	(3)
Impairment reversals/(impairments)	(338)	(6)	(3)	(195)	(120)	(14)	—
Redundancy and restructuring	(552)	(69)	(189)	(136)	(141)	(26)	10
Provisions for onerous contracts	(7)	—	—	(7)	—	—	—
Fair value accounting of commodity derivatives and certain gas contracts	(602)	(252)	(13)	(78)	126	(385)	—
Other	(136)	—	(141)	(1)	(11)	16	—
Total identified items included in Income/(loss) before taxation	(1,789)	(327)	(348)	(526)	(165)	(430)	7
Less: total identified items included in Taxation charge/(credit)	(530)	(87)	(195)	(104)	(43)	(111)	10
Identified items included in Income/(loss) for the period
Divestment gains/(losses)	(129)	1	(6)	(84)	(15)	(23)	(2)
Impairment reversals/(impairments)	(288)	(4)	(2)	(179)	(92)	(10)	—
Redundancy and restructuring	(397)	(48)	(138)	(98)	(101)	(19)	7
Provisions for onerous contracts	(5)	—	—	(5)	—	—	—
Fair value accounting of commodity derivatives and certain gas contracts	(456)	(213)	(3)	(56)	95	(279)	—
Impact of exchange rate movements and inflationary adjustments on tax balances	120	24	104	—	—	—	(8)
Other	(105)	—	(108)	—	(8)	12	—
Impact on CCS earnings	(1,259)	(240)	(153)	(422)	(122)	(319)	(3)
Impact on CCS earnings attributable to non-controlling interest	—	—	—	—	—	—	—
Impact on CCS earnings attributable to Shell plc shareholders	(1,259)	(240)	(153)	(422)	(122)	(319)	(3)

Page 29



SHELL PLC 3rd QUARTER 2024 UNAUDITED RESULTS



Q2 2024	$ million
	Total	Integrated Gas	Upstream	Marketing	Chemicals and Products	Renewables and Energy Solutions	Corporate
Identified items included in Income/(loss) before taxation
Divestment gains/(losses)	143	2	131	(60)	(8)	79	—
Impairment reversals/(impairments)	(1,932)	(18)	(80)	(1,055)	(619)	(161)	—
Redundancy and restructuring	(211)	(9)	(56)	(69)	(30)	(45)	(2)
Provisions for onerous contracts	(17)	(3)	(14)	—	—	—	—
Fair value accounting of commodity derivatives and certain gas contracts	461	(102)	(29)	63	211	318	—
Other1	(1,271)	(130)	(168)	10	113	7	(1,103)
Total identified items included in Income/(loss) before taxation	(2,826)	(260)	(215)	(1,111)	(333)	198	(1,105)
Less: total identified items included in Taxation charge/(credit)	(157)	(40)	(58)	(286)	165	87	(25)
Identified items included in Income/(loss) for the period
Divestment gains/(losses)	135	1	114	(45)	(6)	71	—
Impairment reversals/(impairments)	(1,728)	(15)	(67)	(783)	(708)	(155)	—
Redundancy and restructuring	(147)	(6)	(33)	(50)	(23)	(33)	(1)
Provisions for onerous contracts	(14)	(3)	(11)	—	—	—	—
Fair value accounting of commodity derivatives and certain gas contracts	319	(98)	(7)	45	156	223	—
Impact of exchange rate movements and inflationary adjustments on tax balances	49	10	(4)	—	—	—	43
Other1	(1,284)	(111)	(148)	7	83	5	(1,122)
Impact on CCS earnings	(2,669)	(220)	(157)	(825)	(499)	112	(1,080)
Impact on CCS earnings attributable to non-controlling interest	18	—	—	—	18	—	—
Impact on CCS earnings attributable to Shell plc shareholders	(2,687)	(220)	(157)	(825)	(517)	112	(1,080)

1.Corporate includes reclassifications from equity to profit and loss of cumulative currency translation differences related to funding structures resulting in unfavourable movements of $1,122 million. These currency translation differences were previously recognised in other comprehensive income and accumulated in equity as part of accumulated other comprehensive income.

Page 30



SHELL PLC 3rd QUARTER 2024 UNAUDITED RESULTS



Q3 2023	$ million
	Total	Integrated Gas	Upstream	Marketing	Chemicals and Products	Renewables and Energy Solutions	Corporate
Identified items included in Income/(loss) before taxation
Divestment gains/(losses)	(75)	6	23	(10)	3	(98)	—
Impairment reversals/(impairments)	(196)	—	(15)	(2)	(103)	(76)	—
Redundancy and restructuring	(20)	(3)	(4)	(5)	(4)	(2)	(3)
Provisions for onerous contracts	—	—	—	—	—	—	—
Fair value accounting of commodity derivatives and certain gas contracts	258	(350)	38	(2)	(88)	659	—
Other	50	(25)	(236)	—	(97)	408	—
Total identified items included in Income/(loss) before taxation	17	(371)	(194)	(18)	(288)	891	(3)
Less: total identified items included in Taxation charge/(credit)	166	4	44	(6)	(75)	225	(25)
Identified items included in Income/(loss) for the period
Divestment gains/(losses)	(68)	4	8	(7)	2	(76)	—
Impairment reversals/(impairments)	(167)	—	(12)	(1)	(79)	(75)	—
Redundancy and restructuring	(14)	(2)	(2)	(4)	(3)	(1)	(2)
Provisions for onerous contracts	—	—	—	—	—	—	—
Fair value accounting of commodity derivatives and certain gas contracts	121	(340)	13	—	(59)	506	—
Impact of exchange rate movements and inflationary adjustments on tax balances	(51)	(13)	(62)	—	—	—	24
Other	29	(25)	(184)	—	(74)	312	—
Impact on CCS earnings	(149)	(375)	(238)	(12)	(213)	667	22
Impact on CCS earnings attributable to non-controlling interest	—	—	—	—	—	—	—
Impact on CCS earnings attributable to Shell plc shareholders	(149)	(375)	(238)	(12)	(213)	667	22

Page 31



SHELL PLC 3rd QUARTER 2024 UNAUDITED RESULTS



Nine months 2024	$ million
	Total	Integrated Gas	Upstream	Marketing	Chemicals and Products	Renewables and Energy Solutions	Corporate
Identified items included in Income/(loss) before taxation
Divestment gains/(losses)	—	—	155	(185)	(35)	68	(3)
Impairment reversals/(impairments)	(2,498)	(32)	(179)	(1,254)	(917)	(116)	—
Redundancy and restructuring	(837)	(79)	(258)	(226)	(190)	(86)	3
Provisions for onerous contracts	(24)	(3)	(14)	(7)	—	—	—
Fair value accounting of commodity derivatives and certain gas contracts	(1,221)	(1,421)	(44)	(9)	(79)	332	—
Other1	(1,281)	(126)	(271)	32	148	39	(1,103)
Total identified items included in Income/(loss) before taxation	(5,859)	(1,663)	(609)	(1,649)	(1,073)	238	(1,104)
Less: total identified items included in Taxation charge/(credit)	(1,290)	(284)	(638)	(394)	5	55	(35)
Identified items included in Income/(loss) for the period
Divestment gains/(losses)	2	—	118	(140)	(28)	54	(2)
Impairment reversals/(impairments)	(2,201)	(24)	(171)	(965)	(952)	(89)	—
Redundancy and restructuring	(597)	(55)	(179)	(163)	(139)	(63)	2
Provisions for onerous contracts	(19)	(3)	(11)	(5)	—	—	—
Fair value accounting of commodity derivatives and certain gas contracts	(1,032)	(1,198)	(11)	(6)	(69)	250	—
Impact of exchange rate movements and inflationary adjustments on tax balances	573	8	512	—	—	—	53
Other1	(1,293)	(107)	(228)	24	110	30	(1,122)
Impact on CCS earnings	(4,569)	(1,379)	28	(1,255)	(1,078)	183	(1,069)
Impact on CCS earnings attributable to non-controlling interest	18	—	—	—	18	—	—
Impact on CCS earnings attributable to Shell plc shareholders	(4,587)	(1,379)	28	(1,255)	(1,096)	183	(1,069)

Page 32



SHELL PLC 3rd QUARTER 2024 UNAUDITED RESULTS



Nine months 2023	$ million
	Total	Integrated Gas	Upstream	Marketing	Chemicals and Products	Renewables and Energy Solutions	Corporate
Identified items included in Income/(loss) before taxation
Divestment gains/(losses)	35	(1)	76	32	(12)	(59)	—
Impairment reversals/(impairments)	(2,952)	(2,274)	(199)	(49)	(300)	(130)	—
Redundancy and restructuring	(54)	—	(10)	(22)	(4)	(1)	(16)
Provisions for onerous contracts	(24)	—	—	—	(24)	—	—
Fair value accounting of commodity derivatives and certain gas contracts	939	(3,047)	387	66	77	3,455	—
Other	116	(25)	(445)	298	(119)	408	—
Total identified items included in Income/(loss) before taxation	(1,941)	(5,347)	(192)	324	(382)	3,672	(16)
Less: total identified items included in Taxation charge/(credit)	278	(722)	165	11	(104)	894	34
Identified items included in Income/(loss) for the period
Divestment gains/(losses)	50	—	80	24	(9)	(45)	—
Impairment reversals/(impairments)	(2,284)	(1,700)	(188)	(50)	(227)	(119)	—
Redundancy and restructuring	(35)	—	(3)	(17)	(3)	(1)	(11)
Provisions for onerous contracts	(18)	—	—	—	(18)	—	—
Fair value accounting of commodity derivatives and certain gas contracts	52	(2,821)	106	60	75	2,632	—
Impact of exchange rate movements and inflationary adjustments on tax balances	8	(31)	78	—	—	—	(39)
Other	7	(74)	(431)	297	(96)	312	—
Impact on CCS earnings	(2,219)	(4,625)	(357)	314	(278)	2,778	(50)
Impact on CCS earnings attributable to non-controlling interest	—	—	—	—	—	—	—
Impact on CCS earnings attributable to Shell plc shareholders	(2,219)	(4,625)	(357)	314	(278)	2,778	(50)

The identified items categories above may include after-tax impacts of identified items of joint ventures and associates which are fully reported within “Share of profit/(loss) of joint ventures and associates” in the Consolidated Statement of Income, and fully reported as identified items included in Income/(loss) before taxation in the table above. Identified items related to subsidiaries are consolidated and reported across appropriate lines of the Consolidated Statement of Income. Only pre-tax identified items reported by subsidiaries are taken into account in the calculation of underlying operating expenses (Reference F).

Provisions for onerous contracts: Provisions for onerous contracts that relate to businesses that Shell has exited or to redundant assets or assets that cannot be used.

Fair value accounting of commodity derivatives and certain gas contracts: In the ordinary course of business, Shell enters into contracts to supply or purchase oil and gas products, as well as power and environmental products. Shell also enters into contracts for tolling, pipeline and storage capacity. Derivative contracts are entered into for mitigation of resulting economic exposures (generally price exposure) and these derivative contracts are carried at period-end market price (fair value), with movements in fair value recognised in income for the period. Supply and purchase contracts entered into for operational purposes, as well as contracts for tolling, pipeline and storage capacity, are, by contrast, recognised when the transaction occurs; furthermore, inventory is carried at historical cost or net realisable value, whichever is lower. As a consequence, accounting mismatches occur because: (a) the supply or purchase transaction is recognised in a different period, or (b) the inventory is measured on a different basis. In addition, certain contracts are, due to pricing or delivery conditions, deemed to contain embedded derivatives or written options and are also required to be carried at fair value even though they are entered into for operational purposes. The accounting impacts are reported as identified items.

Impact of exchange rate movements and inflationary adjustments on tax balances represents the impact on tax balances of exchange rate movements and inflationary adjustments arising on (a) the conversion to dollars of the local currency tax base of non-monetary assets and liabilities, as well as losses (this primarily impacts the Upstream and Integrated Gas segments) and (b) the conversion of dollar-denominated inter-segment loans to local currency, leading to taxable exchange rate gains or losses (this primarily impacts the Corporate segment).

Other identified items represent other credits or charges that based on Shell management’s assessment hinder the comparative understanding of Shell’s financial results from period to period.

Page 33



SHELL PLC 3rd QUARTER 2024 UNAUDITED RESULTS

B. Adjusted Earnings per share

Adjusted Earnings per share is calculated as Adjusted Earnings (see Reference A), divided by the weighted average number of shares used as the basis for basic earnings per share (see Note 4).

C. Cash capital expenditure

Cash capital expenditure represents cash spent on maintaining and developing assets as well as on investments in the period. Management regularly monitors this measure as a key lever to delivering sustainable cash flows. Cash capital expenditure is the sum of the following lines from the Consolidated Statement of Cash Flows: Capital expenditure, Investments in joint ventures and associates and Investments in equity securities.

See Note 2 “Segment information” for the reconciliation of cash capital expenditure.

D. Capital employed and Return on average capital employed

Return on average capital employed (“ROACE”) measures the efficiency of Shell’s utilisation of the capital that it employs. Effective first quarter 2024, the definition of capital employed has been amended to reflect the deduction of cash and cash equivalents. In addition, the numerator applied to ROACE on an Adjusted Earnings plus non-controlling interest basis has been amended to remove interest on cash and cash equivalents for consistency with the revised capital employed definition. Comparative information has been revised to reflect the updated definition. Also, the presentation of ROACE on a net income basis has been discontinued, as this measure is not routinely used by management in assessing the efficiency of capital employed.

The measure refers to Capital employed which consists of total equity, current debt, and non-current debt reduced by cash and cash equivalents.

Management believes that the updated methodology better reflects Shell’s approach to managing capital employed, including the management of cash and cash equivalents alongside total debt and equity as part of the financial framework.

In this calculation, the sum of Adjusted Earnings (see Reference A) plus non-controlling interest (NCI) excluding identified items for the current and previous three quarters, adjusted for after-tax interest expense and after-tax interest income, is expressed as a percentage of the average capital employed excluding cash and cash equivalents for the same period.



$ million	Quarters
	Q3 2024	Q2 2024	Q3 2023
Current debt	10,119	12,114	8,046
Non-current debt	72,028	72,252	73,944
Total equity	192,943	192,094	190,237
Less: Cash and cash equivalents	(43,031)	(45,094)	(35,978)
Capital employed – opening	232,059	231,366	236,250
Current debt	12,015	10,849	10,119
Non-current debt	64,597	64,619	72,028
Total equity	189,538	187,190	192,943
Less: Cash and cash equivalents	(42,252)	(38,148)	(43,031)
Capital employed – closing	223,898	224,511	232,059
Capital employed – average	227,979	227,939	234,154

Page 34



SHELL PLC 3rd QUARTER 2024 UNAUDITED RESULTS



$ million	Quarters
	Q3 2024	Q2 2024	Q3 2023
Adjusted Earnings – current and previous three quarters (Reference A)	27,361	27,558	30,758
Add: Income/(loss) attributable to NCI – current and previous three quarters	376	409	275
Add: Current cost of supplies adjustment attributable to NCI – current and previous three quarters	56	(25)	(12)
Less: Identified items attributable to NCI (Reference A) – current and previous three quarters	7	7	13
Adjusted Earnings plus NCI excluding identified items – current and previous three quarters	27,787	27,935	31,008
Add: Interest expense after tax – current and previous three quarters	2,698	2,650	2,685
Less: Interest income after tax on cash and cash equivalents – current and previous three quarters	1,392	1,395	1,179
Adjusted Earnings plus NCI excluding identified items before interest expense and interest income – current and previous three quarters	29,093	29,190	32,514
Capital employed – average	227,979	227,939	234,154
ROACE on an Adjusted Earnings plus NCI basis	12.8%	12.8%	13.9%

E. Net debt and gearing

Net debt is defined as the sum of current and non-current debt, less cash and cash equivalents, adjusted for the fair value of derivative financial instruments used to hedge foreign exchange and interest rate risk relating to debt, and associated collateral balances. Management considers this adjustment useful because it reduces the volatility of net debt caused by fluctuations in foreign exchange and interest rates, and eliminates the potential impact of related collateral payments or receipts. Debt-related derivative financial instruments are a subset of the derivative financial instrument assets and liabilities presented on the balance sheet. Collateral balances are reported under “Trade and other receivables” or “Trade and other payables” as appropriate.

Gearing is a measure of Shell’s capital structure and is defined as net debt (total debt less cash and cash equivalents) as a percentage of total capital (net debt plus total equity).



$ million
	September 30, 2024		June 30, 2024		September 30, 2023
Current debt	12,015		10,849		10,119
Non-current debt	64,597		64,619		72,028
Total debt	76,613		75,468		82,147
Of which lease liabilities	25,590		25,600		27,854
Add: Debt-related derivative financial instruments: net liability/(asset)	1,694		2,460		3,116
Add: Collateral on debt-related derivatives: net liability/(asset)	(821)		(1,466)		(1,762)
Less: Cash and cash equivalents	(42,252)		(38,148)		(43,031)
Net debt	35,234		38,314		40,470
Total equity	189,538		187,190		192,943
Total capital	224,772		225,505		233,414
Gearing	15.7	%	17.0	%	17.3	%

F. Operating expenses and Underlying operating expenses

Operating expenses

Operating expenses is a measure of Shell’s cost management performance, comprising the following items from the Consolidated Statement of Income: production and manufacturing expenses; selling, distribution and administrative expenses; and research and development expenses.

Page 35



SHELL PLC 3rd QUARTER 2024 UNAUDITED RESULTS



Q3 2024	$ million
	Total	Integrated Gas	Upstream	Marketing	Chemicals and Products	Renewables and Energy Solutions	Corporate
Production and manufacturing expenses	6,138	1,164	2,394	367	1,766	453	(6)
Selling, distribution and administrative expenses	3,139	(1)	(39)	2,408	453	209	110
Research and development	294	27	75	55	34	22	81
Operating expenses	9,570	1,190	2,430	2,830	2,253	684	185



Q2 2024	$ million
	Total	Integrated Gas	Upstream	Marketing	Chemicals and Products	Renewables and Energy Solutions	Corporate
Production and manufacturing expenses	5,593	1,050	2,219	320	1,573	422	10
Selling, distribution and administrative expenses	3,094	64	62	2,295	293	279	101
Research and development	263	32	61	47	37	24	62
Operating expenses	8,950	1,146	2,341	2,662	1,902	725	173



Q3 2023	$ million
	Total	Integrated Gas	Upstream	Marketing	Chemicals and Products	Renewables and Energy Solutions	Corporate
Production and manufacturing expenses	6,384	1,125	2,266	335	1,900	760	(1)
Selling, distribution and administrative expenses1	3,447	50	42	2,448	501	286	121
Research and development1	267	30	77	60	44	(26)	81
Operating expenses	10,097	1,204	2,384	2,843	2,444	1,021	201



Nine months 2024	$ million
	Total	Integrated Gas	Upstream	Marketing	Chemicals and Products	Renewables and Energy Solutions	Corporate
Production and manufacturing expenses	17,541	3,170	6,881	1,052	4,973	1,454	10
Selling, distribution and administrative expenses	9,208	125	80	6,891	1,166	646	300
Research and development	768	85	194	136	104	58	192
Operating expenses	27,517	3,380	7,156	8,079	6,243	2,158	501



Nine months 2023	$ million
	Total	Integrated Gas	Upstream	Marketing	Chemicals and Products	Renewables and Energy Solutions	Corporate
Production and manufacturing expenses	18,433	3,341	6,591	1,030	5,579	1,878	14
Selling, distribution and administrative expenses1	9,811	114	217	6,906	1,494	787	293
Research and development1	817	84	216	184	129	2	202
Operating expenses	29,062	3,540	7,024	8,120	7,201	2,667	509

1.From the first quarter 2024, Wholesale commercial fuels forms part of Mobility with inclusion in the Marketing segment (previously Chemicals and Products segment). Prior period comparatives have been revised to conform with current year presentation with an offsetting impact between Marketing and Chemicals and Products segments (see Note 2). Also, from the first quarter 2024, Shell’s longer-term innovation portfolio is managed centrally and hence reported as part of the Corporate segment (previously all other segments). Prior period comparatives have been revised to conform with current year presentation with an offsetting impact on all the other segments (see Note 2).

Underlying operating expenses

Underlying operating expenses is a measure aimed at facilitating a comparative understanding of performance from period to period by removing the effects of identified items, which, either individually or collectively, can cause volatility, in some cases driven by external factors.

Page 36



SHELL PLC 3rd QUARTER 2024 UNAUDITED RESULTS

Quarters

$ million

Nine months

Q3 2024

Q2 2024

Q3 2023

2024

2023

9,570

8,950

10,097

Operating expenses

27,517

29,062

(552)

(210)

(19)

Redundancy and restructuring (charges)/reversal

(834)

(51)

(154)

(212)

(343)

(Provisions)/reversal

(366)

(376)

—

123

—

Other

252

—

(706)

(299)

(362)

Total identified items

(948)

(426)

8,864

8,651

9,735

Underlying operating expenses

26,569

28,635

G. Free cash flow and Organic free cash flow

Free cash flow is used to evaluate cash available for financing activities, including dividend payments and debt servicing, after investment in maintaining and growing the business. It is defined as the sum of “Cash flow from operating activities” and “Cash flow from investing activities”.

Cash flows from acquisition and divestment activities are removed from Free cash flow to arrive at the Organic free cash flow, a measure used by management to evaluate the generation of free cash flow without these activities.



Quarters			$ million	Nine months
Q3 2024	Q2 2024	Q3 2023		2024	2023
14,684	13,508	12,332	Cash flow from operating activities	41,522	41,622
(3,857)	(3,338)	(4,827)	Cash flow from investing activities	(10,723)	(12,080)
10,827	10,170	7,505	Free cash flow	30,799	29,542
194	769	259	Less: Divestment proceeds (Reference I)	1,988	2,477
—	—	(3)	Add: Tax paid on divestments (reported under “Other investing cash outflows”)	—	—
—	189	3	Add: Cash outflows related to inorganic capital expenditure1	251	2,316
10,633	9,590	7,246	Organic free cash flow2	29,062	29,381

1.Cash outflows related to inorganic capital expenditure includes portfolio actions which expand Shell’s activities through acquisitions and restructuring activities as reported in capital expenditure lines in the Consolidated Statement of Cash Flows.

2.Free cash flow less divestment proceeds, adding back outflows related to inorganic expenditure.

H. Cash flow from operating activities and cash flow from operating activities excluding working capital movements

Working capital movements are defined as the sum of the following items in the Consolidated Statement of Cash Flows: (i) (increase)/decrease in inventories, (ii) (increase)/decrease in current receivables, and (iii) increase/(decrease) in current payables.

Cash flow from operating activities excluding working capital movements is a measure used by Shell to analyse its operating cash generation over time excluding the timing effects of changes in inventories and operating receivables and payables from period to period.

Quarters

$ million

Nine months

Q3 2024

Q2 2024

Q3 2023

2024

2023

14,684

13,508

12,332

Cash flow from operating activities

41,522

41,622

2,705

(954)

(3,151)

(Increase)/decrease in inventories

1,143

2,237

4,057

1,965

(1,126)

(Increase)/decrease in current receivables

5,827

13,105

(4,096)

(1,269)

4,498

Increase/(decrease) in current payables1

(7,314)

(10,881)

2,665

(258)

221

(Increase)/decrease in working capital

(344)

4,462

12,019

13,766

12,111

Cash flow from operating activities excluding working capital movements

41,867

37,160

1.To further enhance consistency between working capital and the Balance Sheet and the Statement of Cash Flows, from January 1, 2024, onwards movements in current other provisions are recognised in ‘Decommissioning and other provisions’ instead of ‘Increase/(decrease) in current payables’. Comparatives for the third quarter 2023 and the nine months 2023 have been reclassified accordingly by $212 million and $40 million respectively to conform with current period presentation.

Page 37



SHELL PLC 3rd QUARTER 2024 UNAUDITED RESULTS

I. Divestment proceeds

Divestment proceeds represent cash received from divestment activities in the period. Management regularly monitors this measure as a key lever to deliver free cash flow.



Quarters			$ million	Nine months
Q3 2024	Q2 2024	Q3 2023		2024	2023
94	710	184	Proceeds from sale of property, plant and equipment and businesses	1,128	2,024
94	57	68	Proceeds from joint ventures and associates from sale, capital reduction and repayment of long-term loans	284	425
6	2	7	Proceeds from sale of equity securities	576	28
194	769	259	Divestment proceeds	1,988	2,477

Page 38



SHELL PLC 3rd QUARTER 2024 UNAUDITED RESULTS

CAUTIONARY STATEMENT

All amounts shown throughout this Unaudited Condensed Interim Financial Report are unaudited. All peak production figures in Portfolio Developments are quoted at 100% expected production. The numbers presented throughout this Unaudited Condensed Interim Financial Report may not sum precisely to the totals provided and percentages may not precisely reflect the absolute figures, due to rounding.

The companies in which Shell plc directly and indirectly owns investments are separate legal entities. In this Unaudited Condensed Interim Financial Report, “Shell”, “Shell Group” and “Group” are sometimes used for convenience where references are made to Shell plc and its subsidiaries in general. Likewise, the words “we”, “us” and “our” are also used to refer to Shell plc and its subsidiaries in general or to those who work for them. These terms are also used where no useful purpose is served by identifying the particular entity or entities. ‘‘Subsidiaries’’, “Shell subsidiaries” and “Shell companies” as used in this Unaudited Condensed Interim Financial Report, refer to entities over which Shell plc either directly or indirectly has control. The term “joint venture”, “joint operations”, “joint arrangements”, and “associates” may also be used to refer to a commercial arrangement in which Shell has a direct or indirect ownership interest with one or more parties. The term “Shell interest” is used for convenience to indicate the direct and/or indirect ownership interest held by Shell in an entity or unincorporated joint arrangement, after exclusion of all third-party interest.

Forward-Looking Statements

This Unaudited Condensed Interim Financial Report contains forward-looking statements (within the meaning of the U.S. Private Securities Litigation Reform Act of 1995) concerning the financial condition, results of operations and businesses of Shell. All statements other than statements of historical fact are, or may be deemed to be, forward-looking statements. Forward-looking statements are statements of future expectations that are based on management’s current expectations and assumptions and involve known and unknown risks and uncertainties that could cause actual results, performance or events to differ materially from those expressed or implied in these statements. Forward-looking statements include, among other things, statements concerning the potential exposure of Shell to market risks and statements expressing management’s expectations, beliefs, estimates, forecasts, projections and assumptions. These forward-looking statements are identified by their use of terms and phrases such as “aim”; “ambition”; ‘‘anticipate’’; ‘‘believe’’; “commit”; “commitment”; ‘‘could’’; ‘‘estimate’’; ‘‘expect’’; ‘‘goals’’; ‘‘intend’’; ‘‘may’’; “milestones”; ‘‘objectives’’; ‘‘outlook’’; ‘‘plan’’; ‘‘probably’’; ‘‘project’’; ‘‘risks’’; “schedule”; ‘‘seek’’; ‘‘should’’; ‘‘target’’; ‘‘will’’; “would” and similar terms and phrases. There are a number of factors that could affect the future operations of Shell and could cause those results to differ materially from those expressed in the forward-looking statements included in this Unaudited Condensed Interim Financial Report, including (without limitation): (a) price fluctuations in crude oil and natural gas; (b) changes in demand for Shell’s products; (c) currency fluctuations; (d) drilling and production results; (e) reserves estimates; (f) loss of market share and industry competition; (g) environmental and physical risks; (h) risks associated with the identification of suitable potential acquisition properties and targets, and successful negotiation and completion of such transactions; (i) the risk of doing business in developing countries and countries subject to international sanctions; (j) legislative, judicial, fiscal and regulatory developments including regulatory measures addressing climate change; (k) economic and financial market conditions in various countries and regions; (l) political risks, including the risks of expropriation and renegotiation of the terms of contracts with governmental entities, delays or advancements in the approval of projects and delays in the reimbursement for shared costs; (m) risks associated with the impact of pandemics, such as the COVID-19 (coronavirus) outbreak, regional conflicts, such as the Russia-Ukraine war, and a significant cybersecurity breach; and (n) changes in trading conditions. No assurance is provided that future dividend payments will match or exceed previous dividend payments. All forward-looking statements contained in this Unaudited Condensed Interim Financial Report are expressly qualified in their entirety by the cautionary statements contained or referred to in this section. Readers should not place undue reliance on forward-looking statements. Additional risk factors that may affect future results are contained in Shell plc’s Form 20-F for the year ended December 31, 2023 (available at www.shell.com/investors/news-and-filings/sec-filings.html and www.sec.gov). These risk factors also expressly qualify all forward-looking statements contained in this Unaudited Condensed Interim Financial Report and should be considered by the reader. Each forward-looking statement speaks only as of the date of this Unaudited Condensed Interim Financial Report, October 31, 2024. Neither Shell plc nor any of its subsidiaries undertake any obligation to publicly update or revise any forward-looking statement as a result of new information, future events or other information. In light of these risks, results could differ materially from those stated, implied or inferred from the forward-looking statements contained in this Unaudited Condensed Interim Financial Report.

Shell’s Net Carbon Intensity

Also, in this Unaudited Condensed Interim Financial Report we may refer to Shell’s “Net Carbon Intensity” (NCI), which includes Shell’s carbon emissions from the production of our energy products, our suppliers’ carbon emissions in supplying energy for that production and our customers’ carbon emissions associated with their use of the energy products we sell. Shell’s NCI also includes the emissions associated with the production and use of energy products produced by others which Shell purchases for resale. Shell only controls its own emissions. The use of the terms Shell’s “Net Carbon Intensity” or NCI are for convenience only and not intended to suggest these emissions are those of Shell plc or its subsidiaries.

Shell’s Net-Zero Emissions Target

Shell’s operating plan, outlook and budgets are forecasted for a ten-year period and are updated every year. They reflect the current economic environment and what we can reasonably expect to see over the next ten years. Accordingly, they reflect our Scope 1, Scope 2 and NCI targets over the next ten years. However, Shell’s operating plans cannot reflect our 2050 net-zero emissions target, as this target is currently outside our planning period. In the future, as society moves towards net-zero emissions, we expect Shell’s operating plans to reflect this movement. However, if society is not net zero in 2050, as of today, there would be significant risk that Shell may not meet this target.

Forward-Looking Non-GAAP measures

This Unaudited Condensed Interim Financial Report may contain certain forward-looking non-GAAP measures such as cash capital expenditure and divestments. We are unable to provide a reconciliation of these forward-looking non-GAAP measures to the most comparable GAAP financial measures because certain information needed to reconcile those non-GAAP measures to the most comparable GAAP financial measures is dependent on future events some of which are outside the control of Shell, such as oil and gas prices, interest rates and exchange rates. Moreover, estimating such GAAP measures with the required precision necessary to provide a meaningful reconciliation is extremely difficult and could not be accomplished without unreasonable effort. Non-GAAP measures in respect of future periods which cannot be reconciled to the most comparable GAAP financial measure are calculated in a manner which is consistent with the accounting policies applied in Shell plc’s consolidated financial statements.

The contents of websites referred to in this Unaudited Condensed Interim Financial Report do not form part of this Unaudited Condensed Interim Financial Report.

We may have used certain terms, such as resources, in this Unaudited Condensed Interim Financial Report that the United States Securities and Exchange Commission (SEC) strictly prohibits us from including in our filings with the SEC. Investors are urged to consider closely the disclosure in our Form 20-F, File No 1-32575, available on the SEC website www.sec.gov.

This Unaudited Condensed Interim Financial Report contains inside information.

Page 39



SHELL PLC 3rd QUARTER 2024 UNAUDITED RESULTS

October 31, 2024


The information in this Unaudited Condensed Interim Financial Report reflects the unaudited consolidated interim financial position and results of Shell plc. Company No. 4366849, Registered Office: Shell Centre, London, SE1 7NA, England, UK.

Contacts:

– Sean Ashley, Company Secretary

– Media: International +44 (0) 207 934 5550; USA +1 832 337 4355

LEI number of Shell plc: 21380068P1DRHMJ8KU70

Classification: Inside Information

Page 40

The MIL Network –

January 25, 2025

MIL-OSI: Shell plc publishes third quarter 2024 press release

Source: GlobeNewswire (MIL-OSI)

London, October 31, 2024

“Shell delivered another set of strong results. We continue to deliver more value with less emissions, whilst enhancing the resilience of our balance sheet. Today, we announce another $3.5 billion buyback programme for the next three months, making this the 12^th consecutive quarter in which we have announced $3 billion or more in buybacks.”

Shell plc Chief Executive Officer, Wael Sawan

STRONG RESULTS, CONSISTENT DISTRIBUTIONS

Q3 2024 Adjusted Earnings¹ of $6.0 billion, despite the lower crude prices and weaker refining margins, reflect strong operational performance in Integrated Gas, Upstream and Marketing.
CFFO of $14.7 billion for the quarter includes a working capital inflow of $2.7 billion; net debt reduced to $35.2 billion ($9.6 billion excluding lease liabilities).
Cash capex for 2024 is expected to be below the lower end of the $22 – 25 billion range.
Commencing a $3.5 billion share buyback programme, expected to be completed by Q4 2024 results announcement. Over the last 4 quarters, total shareholder distributions paid were 43% of CFFO. Dividend stable at $0.344 per ordinary share.

$ million¹		Adj. Earnings	Adj. EBITDA	CFFO	Cash capex
Integrated Gas		2,871	5,234	3,623	1,236
Upstream		2,443	7,871	5,268	1,974
Marketing		1,182	2,081	2,722	525
Chemicals & Products²		463	1,240	3,321	761
Renewables & Energy Solutions		(162)	(75)	(364)	409
Corporate		(643)	(346)	115	45
Less: Non-controlling interest (NCI)		126
Shell	Q3 2024	6,028	16,005	14,684	4,950
Shell	Q2 2024	6,293	16,806	13,508	4,719

¹Income/(loss) attributable to shareholders for Q3 2024 is $4.3 billion. Reconciliation of non-GAAP measures can be found in the unaudited results, available at www.shell.com/investors.

²Chemicals & Products Adjusted Earnings at a subsegment level are as follows – Chemicals $(0.1) billion and Products $0.6 billion.

CFFO of $14.7 billion for Q3 2024 includes a working capital inflow of $2.7 billion mainly due to lower prices. CFFO reflects tax payments of $3.0 billion. Net debt reduced by $3.1 billion over the quarter to $35.2 billion ($9.6 billion excluding lease liabilities).

$ billion¹	Q3 2023	Q4 2023	Q1 2024	Q2 2024	Q3 2024
Divestment proceeds	0.3	0.6	1.0	0.8	0.2
Free cash flow	7.5	6.9	9.8	10.2	10.8
Net debt	40.5	43.5	40.5	38.3	35.2

¹ Reconciliation of non-GAAP measures can be found in the unaudited results, available at www.shell.com/investors.

Q3 2024 FINANCIAL PERFORMANCE DRIVERS

INTEGRATED GAS

Key data	Q2 2024	Q3 2024	Q4 2024 outlook
Realised liquids price ($/bbl)	68	63	—
Realised gas price ($/thousand scf)	7.6	7.9	—
Production (kboe/d)	980	941	900 – 960
LNG liquefaction volumes (MT)	6.9	7.5	6.9 – 7.5
LNG sales volumes (MT)	16.4	17.0	—

Adjusted Earnings were higher than in Q2 2024, due to higher LNG liquefaction volumes. Trading and optimisation results
were in line with a strong Q2 2024.
Q4 2024 production outlook reflects scheduled maintenance at Pearl GTL in Qatar.

UPSTREAM

Key data	Q2 2024	Q3 2024	Q4 2024 outlook
Realised liquids price ($/bbl)	78	75	—
Realised gas price ($/thousand scf)	6.2	6.6	—
Liquids production (kboe/d)	1,297	1,321	—
Gas production (million scf/d)	2,818	2,844	—
Total production (kboe/d)	1,783	1,811	1,750 – 1,950

Adjusted Earnings were higher than in Q2 2024, as lower prices were offset by lower well write-offs than in the previous quarter.

MARKETING

Key data	Q2 2024	Q3 2024	Q4 2024 outlook
Marketing sales volumes (kb/d)	2,868	2,945	2,550 – 3,050
Mobility (kb/d)	2,078	2,119	—
Lubricants (kb/d)	84	81	—
Sectors & Decarbonisation (kb/d)	706	745	—

Wholesale commercial fuels, previously reported in the Chemicals & Products segment, is reported in the Marketing segment (Mobility) with effect from Q1 2024.
Comparative information for the Marketing segment and the Chemicals & Product segment has been revised.

Adjusted Earnings were higher than in Q2 2024 due to improved Mobility unit margins and impact of seasonally higher volumes.

CHEMICALS & PRODUCTS

Key data	Q2 2024	Q3 2024	Q4 2024 outlook
Refinery processing intake (kb/d)	1,429	1,305	—
Chemicals sales volumes (kT)	3,052	3,015	—
Refinery utilisation (%)	92	81	75 – 83
Chemicals manufacturing plant utilisation (%)	80	76	72 – 80
Global indicative refining margin ($/bbl)	7.7	5.5	—
Global indicative chemical margin ($/t)	155	164	—

Wholesale commercial fuels, previously reported in the Chemicals & Products segment, is reported in the Marketing segment (Mobility) with effect from Q1 2024.

Comparative information for the Marketing segment and the Chemicals & Products segment has been revised.

Lower refining margins in Q3 2024 were driven by a stabilising market with increased supply. Chemicals Adjusted Earnings
were lower than in Q2 2024 due to lower utilisation and lower realised prices.
Trading and optimisation results were in line with Q2 2024.

RENEWABLES & ENERGY SOLUTIONS

Key data	Q2 2024	Q3 2024
External power sales (TWh)	74	79
Sales of pipeline gas to end-use customers (TWh)	148	148
Renewables power generation capacity (GW)*	7.1	7.3
in operation (GW)	3.3	3.4
under construction and/or committed for sale (GW)	3.8	3.9

*Excludes Shell’s equity share of associates where information cannot be obtained.

Adjusted Earnings were in line with Q2 2024.

Renewables and Energy Solutions includes activities such as renewable power generation, the marketing and trading and optimisation of power and pipeline gas, as well as carbon credits, and digitally enabled customer solutions.
It also includes the production and marketing of hydrogen, development of commercial carbon capture and storage hubs, investment in nature-based projects that avoid or reduce carbon emissions, and Shell Ventures, which invests in companies that work to accelerate the energy and mobility transformation.

CORPORATE

Key data	Q2 2024	Q3 2024	Q4 2024 outlook
Adjusted Earnings ($ billion)	(0.6)	(0.6)	(0.8) – (0.6)

The Adjusted Earnings outlook is a net expense of $2.2 – 2.4 billion for the full year 2024.

UPCOMING ANNOUNCED INVESTOR EVENTS

January 30, 2025	Fourth quarter 2024 results and dividends
May 2, 2025	First quarter 2025 results and dividends
July 31, 2025	Second quarter 2025 results and dividends
October 30, 2025	Third quarter 2025 results and dividends

USEFUL LINKS

Results materials Q 3 2024

Quarterly Databook Q 3 2024

Webcast registration Q3 2024

Dividend announcement Q 3 2024

ALTERNATIVE PERFORMANCE (NON-GAAP) MEASURES

This announcement includes certain measures that are calculated and presented on the basis of methodologies other than in accordance with generally accepted accounting principles (GAAP) such as IFRS, including Adjusted Earnings, Adjusted EBITDA, CFFO excluding working capital movements, Cash capital expenditure, free cash flow, Divestment proceeds and Net debt. This information, along with comparable GAAP measures, is useful to investors because it provides a basis for measuring Shell plc’s operating performance and ability to retire debt and invest in new business opportunities. Shell plc’s management uses these financial measures, along with the most directly comparable GAAP financial measures, in evaluating the business performance.

This announcement may contain certain forward-looking non-GAAP measures for cash capital expenditure and divestments. We are unable to provide a reconciliation of these forward-looking non-GAAP measures to the most comparable GAAP financial measures because certain information needed to reconcile the non-GAAP measures to the most comparable GAAP financial measures is dependent on future events some of which are outside the control of the company, such as oil and gas prices, interest rates and exchange rates. Moreover, estimating such GAAP measures with the required precision necessary to provide a meaningful reconciliation is extremely difficult and could not be accomplished without unreasonable effort. Non-GAAP measures in respect of future periods which cannot be reconciled to the most comparable GAAP financial measure are estimated in a manner which is consistent with the accounting policies applied in Shell plc’s consolidated financial statements.

CAUTIONARY STATEMENT

The companies in which Shell plc directly and indirectly owns investments are separate legal entities. In this announcement “Shell”, “Shell Group” and “Group” are sometimes used for convenience where references are made to Shell plc and its subsidiaries in general. Likewise, the words “we”, “us” and “our” are also used to refer to Shell plc and its subsidiaries in general or to those who work for them. These terms are also used where no useful purpose is served by identifying the particular entity or entities. “Subsidiaries”, “Shell subsidiaries” and “Shell companies” as used in this announcement refer to entities over which Shell plc either directly or indirectly has control. The terms “joint venture”, “joint operations”, “joint arrangements”, and “associates” may also be used to refer to a commercial arrangement in which Shell has a direct or indirect ownership interest with one or more parties. The term “Shell interest” is used for convenience to indicate the direct and/or indirect ownership interest held by Shell in an entity or unincorporated joint arrangement, after exclusion of all third-party interest.

This announcement contains forward-looking statements (within the meaning of the U.S. Private Securities Litigation Reform Act of 1995) concerning the financial condition, results of operations and businesses of Shell. All statements other than statements of historical fact are, or may be deemed to be, forward-looking statements. Forward-looking statements are statements of future expectations that are based on management’s current expectations and assumptions and involve known and unknown risks and uncertainties that could cause actual results, performance or events to differ materially from those expressed or implied in these statements. Forward-looking statements include, among other things, statements concerning the potential exposure of Shell to market risks and statements expressing management’s expectations, beliefs, estimates, forecasts, projections and assumptions. These forward-looking statements are identified by their use of terms and phrases such as “aim”; “ambition”; “anticipate”; “believe”; “commit”; “commitment”; “could”; “estimate”; “expect”; “goals”; “intend”; “may”; “milestones”; “objectives”; “outlook”; “plan”; “probably”; “project”; “risks”; “schedule”; “seek”; “should”; “target”; “will”; “would” and similar terms and phrases. There are a number of factors that could affect the future operations of Shell and could cause those results to differ materially from those expressed in the forward-looking statements included in this [report], including (without limitation): (a) price fluctuations in crude oil and natural gas; (b) changes in demand for Shell’s products; (c) currency fluctuations; (d) drilling and production results; (e) reserves estimates; (f) loss of market share and industry competition; (g) environmental and physical risks; (h) risks associated with the identification of suitable potential acquisition properties and targets, and successful negotiation and completion of such transactions; (i) the risk of doing business in developing countries and countries subject to international sanctions; (j) legislative, judicial, fiscal and regulatory developments including regulatory measures addressing climate change; (k) economic and financial market conditions in various countries and regions; (l) political risks, including the risks of expropriation and renegotiation of the terms of contracts with governmental entities, delays or advancements in the approval of projects and delays in the reimbursement for shared costs; (m) risks associated with the impact of pandemics, such as the COVID-19 (coronavirus) outbreak, regional conflicts, such as the Russia-Ukraine war, and a significant cyber security breach; and (n) changes in trading conditions. No assurance is provided that future dividend payments will match or exceed previous dividend payments. All forward-looking statements contained in this announcement are expressly qualified in their entirety by the cautionary statements contained or referred to in this section. Readers should not place undue reliance on forward-looking statements. Additional risk factors that may affect future results are contained in Shell plc’s Form 20-F for the year ended December 31, 2023 (available at www.shell.com/investors/news-and-filings/sec-filings.html and www.sec.gov). These risk factors also expressly qualify all forward-looking statements contained in this [report] and should be considered by the reader. Each forward-looking statement speaks only as of the date of this announcement, October 31, 2024. Neither Shell plc nor any of its subsidiaries undertake any obligation to publicly update or revise any forward-looking statement as a result of new information, future events or other information. In light of these risks, results could differ materially from those stated, implied or inferred from the forward-looking statements contained in this announcement.

All amounts shown throughout this announcement are unaudited. The numbers presented throughout this announcement may not sum precisely to the totals provided and percentages may not precisely reflect the absolute figures, due to rounding.

Shell’s Net Carbon Intensity

Also, in this announcement we may refer to Shell’s “Net Carbon Intensity” (NCI), which includes Shell’s carbon emissions from the production of our energy products, our suppliers’ carbon emissions in supplying energy for that production and our customers’ carbon emissions associated with their use of the energy products we sell. Shell’s NCI also includes the emissions associated with the production and use of energy products produced by others which Shell purchases for resale. Shell only controls its own emissions. The use of the terms Shell’s “Net Carbon Intensity” or NCI is for convenience only and not intended to suggest these emissions are those of Shell plc or its subsidiaries.

Shell’s Net-Zero Emissions Target

The content of websites referred to in this announcement does not form part of this announcement.

We may have used certain terms, such as resources, in this announcement that the United States Securities and Exchange Commission (SEC) strictly prohibits us from including in our filings with the SEC. Investors are urged to consider closely the disclosure in our Form 20-F, File No 1-32575, available on the SEC website www.sec.gov.

The financial information presented in this announcement does not constitute statutory accounts within the meaning of section 434(3) of the Companies Act 2006 (“the Act”). Statutory accounts for the year ended December 31, 2023 were published in Shell’s Annual Report and Accounts, a copy of which was delivered to the Registrar of Companies for England and Wales, and in Shell’s Form 20-F. The auditor’s report on those accounts was unqualified, did not include a reference to any matters to which the auditor drew attention by way of emphasis without qualifying the report and did not contain a statement under sections 498(2) or 498(3) of the Act.

The information in this announcement does not constitute the unaudited condensed consolidated financial statements which are contained in Shell’s third quarter 2024 unaudited results available on www.shell.com/investors.

CONTACTS

Media: International +44 207 934 5550; USA +1 832 337 4355

The MIL Network –

January 25, 2025

MIL-OSI: Shell plc Third Quarter 2024 Interim Dividend

Source: GlobeNewswire (MIL-OSI)

Shell plc Third Quarter 2024 Interim Dividend

London, October 31, 2024 − The Board of Shell plc (the “Company”) (XLON: SHEL, XNYS: SHEL, XAMS: SHELL) today announced an interim dividend in respect of the third quarter of 2024 of US$ 0.344 per ordinary share.

Details relating to the third quarter 2024 interim dividend

Per ordinary share (GB00BP6MXD84)	Q3 2024
Shell Shares (US$)	0.344

Shareholders will be able to elect to receive their dividends in US dollars, euros or pounds sterling.

Absent any valid election to the contrary, persons holding their ordinary shares through Euroclear Nederland will receive their dividends in euros.

Absent any valid election to the contrary, shareholders (both holding in certificated and uncertificated form (CREST members)) and persons holding their shares through the Shell Corporate Nominee will receive their dividends in pounds sterling.

The pound sterling and euro equivalent dividend payments will be announced on December 9, 2024.

Per ADS (US7802593050)	Q3 2024
Shell ADSs (US$)	0.688

Cash dividends on American Depositary Shares (“ADSs”) will be paid, by default, in US dollars.

Each ADS represents two ordinary shares. ADSs are evidenced by an American Depositary Receipt (“ADR”) certificate. In many cases the terms ADR and ADS are used interchangeably.

Dividend timetable for the third quarter 2024 interim dividend

Event	Date
Announcement date	October 31, 2024
Ex- Dividend Date for ADSs	November 15, 2024
Ex- Dividend Date for ordinary shares	November 14, 2024
Record date	November 15, 2024
Closing of currency election date (see Note below)	November 29, 2024
Pound sterling and euro equivalents announcement date	December 9, 2024
Payment date	December 19, 2024

Note

A different currency election date may apply to shareholders holding shares in a securities account with a bank or financial institution ultimately holding through Euroclear Nederland. This may also apply to other shareholders who do not hold their shares either directly on the Register of Members or in the corporate sponsored nominee arrangement. Shareholders can contact their broker, financial intermediary, bank or financial institution for the election deadline that applies.

Taxation – cash dividends

If you are uncertain as to the tax treatment of any dividends you should consult your tax advisor.

Dividend Reinvestment Programmes (“DRIP”)

The following organisations offer Dividend Reinvestment Plans (“DRIPs”) which enable the Company’s shareholders to elect to have their dividend payments used to purchase the Company’s shares:

Equiniti Financial Services Limited (“EFSL”), for those holding shares (a) directly on the register as certificate holder or as CREST Member and (b) via the Shell Corporate Nominee;
ABN-AMRO NV (“ABN”) for Financial Intermediaries holding shares via Euroclear Nederland;
JPMorgan Chase Bank, N.A. (“JPM”) for holders of ADSs; and
Other DRIPs may also be available from the intermediary through which investors hold their shares and ADSs.

These DRIP offerors provide their DRIPs fully on their account and not on behalf of the Company. Interested parties should contact the relevant DRIP offeror directly.

More information can be found at https://www.shell.com/drip

To be eligible to participate in the DRIPs for the next dividend, shareholders must make a valid dividend reinvestment election before the published date for the close of elections.

Enquiries
Media International: +44 207 934 5550
Media Americas: +1 832 337 4355

Cautionary Note

The companies in which Shell plc directly and indirectly owns investments are separate legal entities. In this announcement “Shell”, “Shell Group” and “Group” are sometimes used for convenience where references are made to Shell plc and its subsidiaries in general. Likewise, the words “we”, “us” and “our” are also used to refer to Shell plc and its subsidiaries in general or to those who work for them. These terms are also used where no useful purpose is served by identifying the particular entity or entities. ‘‘Subsidiaries’’, “Shell subsidiaries” and “Shell companies” as used in this announcement refer to entities over which Shell plc either directly or indirectly has control. The term “joint venture”, “joint operations”, “joint arrangements”, and “associates” may also be used to refer to a commercial arrangement in which Shell has a direct or indirect ownership interest with one or more parties. The term “Shell interest” is used for convenience to indicate the direct and/or indirect ownership interest held by Shell in an entity or unincorporated joint arrangement, after exclusion of all third-party interest.

Forward-Looking Statements
This announcement contains forward-looking statements (within the meaning of the U.S. Private Securities Litigation Reform Act of 1995) concerning the financial condition, results of operations and businesses of Shell. All statements other than statements of historical fact are, or may be deemed to be, forward-looking statements. Forward-looking statements are statements of future expectations that are based on management’s current expectations and assumptions and involve known and unknown risks and uncertainties that could cause actual results, performance or events to differ materially from those expressed or implied in these statements. Forward-looking statements include, among other things, statements concerning the potential exposure of Shell to market risks and statements expressing management’s expectations, beliefs, estimates, forecasts, projections and assumptions. These forward-looking statements are identified by their use of terms and phrases such as “aim”; “ambition”; ‘‘anticipate’’; ‘‘believe’’; “commit”; “commitment”; ‘‘could’’; ‘‘estimate’’; ‘‘expect’’; ‘‘goals’’; ‘‘intend’’; ‘‘may’’; “milestones”; ‘‘objectives’’; ‘‘outlook’’; ‘‘plan’’; ‘‘probably’’; ‘‘project’’; ‘‘risks’’; “schedule”; ‘‘seek’’; ‘‘should’’; ‘‘target’’; ‘‘will’’; “would” and similar terms and phrases. There are a number of factors that could affect the future operations of Shell and could cause those results to differ materially from those expressed in the forward-looking statements included in this announcement, including (without limitation): (a) price fluctuations in crude oil and natural gas; (b) changes in demand for Shell’s products; (c) currency fluctuations; (d) drilling and production results; (e) reserves estimates; (f) loss of market share and industry competition; (g) environmental and physical risks; (h) risks associated with the identification of suitable potential acquisition properties and targets, and successful negotiation and completion of such transactions; (i) the risk of doing business in developing countries and countries subject to international sanctions; (j) legislative, judicial, fiscal and regulatory developments including regulatory measures addressing climate change; (k) economic and financial market conditions in various countries and regions; (l) political risks, including the risks of expropriation and renegotiation of the terms of contracts with governmental entities, delays or advancements in the approval of projects and delays in the reimbursement for shared costs; (m) risks associated with the impact of pandemics, such as the COVID-19 (coronavirus) outbreak, regional conflicts, such as the Russia-Ukraine war, and a significant cybersecurity breach; and (n) changes in trading conditions. No assurance is provided that future dividend payments will match or exceed previous dividend payments. All forward-looking statements contained in this announcement are expressly qualified in their entirety by the cautionary statements contained or referred to in this section. Readers should not place undue reliance on forward-looking statements. Additional risk factors that may affect future results are contained in Shell plc’s Form 20-F for the year ended December 31, 2023 (available at www.shell.com/investors/news-and-filings/sec-filings.html and www.sec.gov). These risk factors also expressly qualify all forward-looking statements contained in this announcement and should be considered by the reader. Each forward-looking statement speaks only as of the date of this announcement, October 31, 2024. Neither Shell plc nor any of its subsidiaries undertake any obligation to publicly update or revise any forward-looking statement as a result of new information, future events or other information. In light of these risks, results could differ materially from those stated, implied or inferred from the forward-looking statements contained in this announcement.

Shell’s Net Carbon Intensity
Also, in this announcement we may refer to Shell’s “Net Carbon Intensity” (NCI), which includes Shell’s carbon emissions from the production of our energy products, our suppliers’ carbon emissions in supplying energy for that production and our customers’ carbon emissions associated with their use of the energy products we sell. Shell’s NCI also includes the emissions associated with the production and use of energy products produced by others which Shell purchases for resale. Shell only controls its own emissions. The use of the terms Shell’s “Net Carbon Intensity” or NCI are for convenience only and not intended to suggest these emissions are those of Shell plc or its subsidiaries.

Shell’s net-zero emissions target
Shell’s operating plan, outlook and budgets are forecasted for a ten-year period and are updated every year. They reflect the current economic environment and what we can reasonably expect to see over the next ten years. Accordingly, they reflect our Scope 1, Scope 2 and NCI targets over the next ten years. However, Shell’s operating plans cannot reflect our 2050 net-zero emissions target, as this target is currently outside our planning period. In the future, as society moves towards net-zero emissions, we expect Shell’s operating plans to reflect this movement. However, if society is not net zero in 2050, as of today, there would be significant risk that Shell may not meet this target.

Forward-Looking non-GAAP measures
This announcement may contain certain forward-looking non-GAAP measures such as cash capital expenditure and divestments. We are unable to provide a reconciliation of these forward-looking non-GAAP measures to the most comparable GAAP financial measures because certain information needed to reconcile those non-GAAP measures to the most comparable GAAP financial measures is dependent on future events some of which are outside the control of Shell, such as oil and gas prices, interest rates and exchange rates. Moreover, estimating such GAAP measures with the required precision necessary to provide a meaningful reconciliation is extremely difficult and could not be accomplished without unreasonable effort. Non-GAAP measures in respect of future periods which cannot be reconciled to the most comparable GAAP financial measure are calculated in a manner which is consistent with the accounting policies applied in Shell plc’s consolidated financial statements.

The contents of websites referred to in this announcement do not form part of this announcement.

LEI number of Shell plc: 21380068P1DRHMJ8KU70
Classification: Additional regulated information required to be disclosed under the laws of a Member State

The MIL Network –

January 25, 2025

MIL-OSI: Shell announces commencement of a share buyback programme

Source: GlobeNewswire (MIL-OSI)

Shell plc

Shell announces commencement of a share buyback programme

October 31, 2024

Shell plc (the ‘Company’) today announces the commencement of a $3.5 billion share buyback programme covering an aggregate contract term of approximately three months (the ‘programme’). The purpose of the programme is to reduce the issued share capital of the Company. All shares repurchased as part of the programme will be cancelled. It is intended that, subject to market conditions, the programme will be completed prior to the Company’s Q4 2024 results announcement, scheduled for January 30, 2025.

The Company has entered into an arrangement with a single broker consisting of two irrevocable, non-discretionary contracts, to enable the purchase of ordinary shares on both London market exchanges (the London Stock Exchange and/or on BATS and/or on Chi-X) (pursuant to one ‘London contract’) and Netherlands exchanges (Euronext Amsterdam and/or on CBOE Europe DXE and/or on Turquoise Europe) (pursuant to one ‘Netherlands contract’) for a period up to and including January 24, 2025. The aggregate maximum consideration for the purchase of ordinary shares under the London contract is $2.1 billion and the maximum consideration for the purchase of ordinary shares under the Netherlands contract is $1.4 billion. Purchases under the London contract will be carried out in accordance with the Company’s authority¹ to repurchase shares on-market and will be effected within certain contractually agreed parameters. Purchases under the Netherlands contract will be carried out in accordance with the Company’s authority¹ to repurchase shares off-market pursuant to the off-market share buyback contract approved by its shareholders and the parameters set out therein.

The maximum number of ordinary shares which may be purchased or committed to be purchased by the Company under the programme (across both contracts) is 525,000,000, which is the maximum number remaining as of the date of this announcement pursuant to the relevant authorities granted by shareholders at the Company’s 2024 Annual General Meeting¹.

The broker will make its trading decisions in relation to the Company’s securities independently of the Company.

The programme will be conducted in accordance with Chapter 9 of the UK Listing Rules, Article 5 of the Market Abuse Regulation 596/2014/EU dealing with buy-back programmes (‘EU MAR’) and EU MAR as “onshored” into UK law from the end of the Brexit transition period (at 11:00 pm on 31 December 2020) through the European Union (Withdrawal) Act 2018 (as amended by the European Union (Withdrawal Agreement) Act 2020), and as amended, supplemented, restated, novated, substituted or replaced including by relevant statutory instruments (including, The Market Abuse (Amendment) (EU Exit) Regulations (SI 2019/310)), from time to time and the Commission Delegated Regulation (EU) 2016/1052 (the ‘EU MAR Delegated Regulation’) and the EU MAR Delegated Regulation as “onshored” into UK law from the end of the Brexit transition period (at 11:00 pm on 31 December 2020) through the European Union (Withdrawal) Act 2018 (as amended by the European Union (Withdrawal Agreement) Act 2020), and as amended, supplemented, restated, novated, substituted or replaced, including by relevant statutory instruments (including, The Market Abuse (Amendment) (EU Exit) Regulations (SI 2019/310)), from time to time.

¹ The existing shareholder authorities to buy back shares granted at the Company’s 2024 Annual General Meeting will expire at the earlier of the close of business on August 20, 2025, and the end of the date of the Company’s 2025 Annual General Meeting. The Company expects to seek renewal of shareholder authority to buy back shares at subsequent Annual General Meetings.

Enquiries

Media International: +44 (0) 207 934 5550

Media Americas: +1 832 337 4355

Cautionary Note

The companies in which Shell plc directly and indirectly owns investments are separate legal entities. In this announcement “Shell”, “Shell Group” and “Group” are sometimes used for convenience where references are made to Shell plc and its subsidiaries in general. Likewise, the words “we”, “us” and “our” are also used to refer to Shell plc and its subsidiaries in general or to those who work for them. These terms are also used where no useful purpose is served by identifying the particular entity or entities. ‘‘Subsidiaries’’, “Shell subsidiaries” and “Shell companies” as used in this announcement refer to entities over which Shell plc either directly or indirectly has control. The term “joint venture”, “joint operations”, “joint arrangements”, and “associates” may also be used to refer to a commercial arrangement in which Shell has a direct or indirect ownership interest with one or more parties. The term “Shell interest” is used for convenience to indicate the direct and/or indirect ownership interest held by Shell in an entity or unincorporated joint arrangement, after exclusion of all third-party interest.

Forward-Looking Statements

This announcement contains forward-looking statements (within the meaning of the U.S. Private Securities Litigation Reform Act of 1995) concerning the financial condition, results of operations and businesses of Shell. All statements other than statements of historical fact are, or may be deemed to be, forward-looking statements. Forward-looking statements are statements of future expectations that are based on management’s current expectations and assumptions and involve known and unknown risks and uncertainties that could cause actual results, performance or events to differ materially from those expressed or implied in these statements. Forward-looking statements include, among other things, statements concerning the potential exposure of Shell to market risks and statements expressing management’s expectations, beliefs, estimates, forecasts, projections and assumptions. These forward-looking statements are identified by their use of terms and phrases such as “aim”; “ambition”; ‘‘anticipate’’; ‘‘believe’’; “commit”; “commitment”; ‘‘could’’; ‘‘estimate’’; ‘‘expect’’; ‘‘goals’’; ‘‘intend’’; ‘‘may’’; “milestones”; ‘‘objectives’’; ‘‘outlook’’; ‘‘plan’’; ‘‘probably’’; ‘‘project’’; ‘‘risks’’; “schedule”; ‘‘seek’’; ‘‘should’’; ‘‘target’’; ‘‘will’’; “would” and similar terms and phrases. There are a number of factors that could affect the future operations of Shell and could cause those results to differ materially from those expressed in the forward-looking statements included in this announcement, including (without limitation): (a) price fluctuations in crude oil and natural gas; (b) changes in demand for Shell’s products; (c) currency fluctuations; (d) drilling and production results; (e) reserves estimates; (f) loss of market share and industry competition; (g) environmental and physical risks; (h) risks associated with the identification of suitable potential acquisition properties and targets, and successful negotiation and completion of such transactions; (i) the risk of doing business in developing countries and countries subject to international sanctions; (j) legislative, judicial, fiscal and regulatory developments including regulatory measures addressing climate change; (k) economic and financial market conditions in various countries and regions; (l) political risks, including the risks of expropriation and renegotiation of the terms of contracts with governmental entities, delays or advancements in the approval of projects and delays in the reimbursement for shared costs; (m) risks associated with the impact of pandemics, such as the COVID-19 (coronavirus) outbreak, regional conflicts, such as the Russia-Ukraine war, and a significant cybersecurity breach; and (n) changes in trading conditions. No assurance is provided that future dividend payments will match or exceed previous dividend payments. All forward-looking statements contained in this announcement are expressly qualified in their entirety by the cautionary statements contained or referred to in this section. Readers should not place undue reliance on forward-looking statements. Additional risk factors that may affect future results are contained in Shell plc’s Form 20-F for the year ended December 31, 2023 (available at www.shell.com/investors/news-and-filings/sec-filings.html and www.sec.gov). These risk factors also expressly qualify all forward-looking statements contained in this announcement and should be considered by the reader. Each forward-looking statement speaks only as of the date of this announcement, October 31, 2024. Neither Shell plc nor any of its subsidiaries undertake any obligation to publicly update or revise any forward-looking statement as a result of new information, future events or other information. In light of these risks, results could differ materially from those stated, implied or inferred from the forward-looking statements contained in this announcement.

Shell’s Net Carbon Intensity

Also, in this announcement we may refer to Shell’s “Net Carbon Intensity” (NCI), which includes Shell’s carbon emissions from the production of our energy products, our suppliers’ carbon emissions in supplying energy for that production and our customers’ carbon emissions associated with their use of the energy products we sell. Shell’s NCI also includes the emissions associated with the production and use of energy products produced by others which Shell purchases for resale. Shell only controls its own emissions. The use of the terms Shell’s “Net Carbon Intensity” or NCI are for convenience only and not intended to suggest these emissions are those of Shell plc or its subsidiaries.

Shell’s net-zero emissions target

Shell’s operating plan, outlook and budgets are forecasted for a ten-year period and are updated every year. They reflect the current economic environment and what we can reasonably expect to see over the next ten years. Accordingly, they reflect our Scope 1, Scope 2 and NCI targets over the next ten years. However, Shell’s operating plans cannot reflect our 2050 net-zero emissions target, as this target is currently outside our planning period. In the future, as society moves towards net-zero emissions, we expect Shell’s operating plans to reflect this movement. However, if society is not net zero in 2050, as of today, there would be significant risk that Shell may not meet this target.

Forward-Looking non-GAAP measures

This announcement may contain certain forward-looking non-GAAP measures such as cash capital expenditure and divestments. We are unable to provide a reconciliation of these forward-looking non-GAAP measures to the most comparable GAAP financial measures because certain information needed to reconcile those non-GAAP measures to the most comparable GAAP financial measures is dependent on future events some of which are outside the control of Shell, such as oil and gas prices, interest rates and exchange rates. Moreover, estimating such GAAP measures with the required precision necessary to provide a meaningful reconciliation is extremely difficult and could not be accomplished without unreasonable effort. Non-GAAP measures in respect of future periods which cannot be reconciled to the most comparable GAAP financial measure are calculated in a manner which is consistent with the accounting policies applied in Shell plc’s consolidated financial statements.

The contents of websites referred to in this announcement do not form part of this announcement.

We may have used certain terms, such as resources, in this announcement that the United States Securities and Exchange Commission (SEC) strictly prohibits us from including in our filings with the SEC. Investors are urged to consider closely the disclosure in our Form 20-F, File No 1-32575, available on the SEC website www.sec.gov.

LEI number of Shell plc: 21380068P1DRHMJ8KU70

Classification: Acquisition or disposal of the issuer’s own shares.

The MIL Network –

January 25, 2025

MIL-OSI: Shell Plc 2025 Interim Dividend Timetable

Source: GlobeNewswire (MIL-OSI)

SHELL PLC 2025 INTERIM DIVIDEND TIMETABLE

London, October 31, 2024

The Board of Shell plc today announced the intended timetable for the 2025 quarterly interim dividends.

2025 Interim Dividend Timetable

Event	4^th Quarter 2024	1^st Quarter 2025	2^nd Quarter 2025	3^rd Quarter 2025
Announcement date	January 30, 2025	May 2, 2025	July 31, 2025	October 30, 2025
Ex- Dividend Date for ADSs	February 14, 2025	May 16, 2025	August 15, 2025	November 14, 2025
Ex- Dividend Date for ordinary shares	February 13, 2025	May 15, 2025	August 14, 2025	November 13, 2025
Record date	February 14, 2025	May 16, 2025	August 15, 2025	November 14, 2025
Closing date for currency election (see Note below)	February 28, 2025	June 2, 2025	September 1, 2025	November 28, 2025
Pounds sterling and euro equivalents announcement date	March 10, 2025	June 9, 2025	September 8, 2025	December 8, 2025
Payment date	March 24, 2025	June 23, 2025	September 22, 2025	December 18, 2025

Note
A different currency election date may apply to shareholders holding shares in a securities account with a bank or financial institution ultimately holding through Euroclear Nederland. This may also apply to other shareholders who do not hold their shares either directly on the Register of Members or in the corporate sponsored nominee arrangement. Shareholders can contact their broker, financial intermediary, bank or financial institution for the election deadline that applies.

The 2025 interim dividend timetable is also available on www.shell.com/dividend.

Enquiries
Media International: +44 207 934 5550
Media Americas: +1 832 337 4355

Cautionary Note
The companies in which Shell plc directly and indirectly owns investments are separate legal entities. In this announcement “Shell”, “Shell Group” and “Group” are sometimes used for convenience where references are made to Shell plc and its subsidiaries in general. Likewise, the words “we”, “us” and “our” are also used to refer to Shell plc and its subsidiaries in general or to those who work for them. These terms are also used where no useful purpose is served by identifying the particular entity or entities. ‘‘Subsidiaries’’, “Shell subsidiaries” and “Shell companies” as used in this announcement refer to entities over which Shell plc either directly or indirectly has control. The term “joint venture”, “joint operations”, “joint arrangements”, and “associates” may also be used to refer to a commercial arrangement in which Shell has a direct or indirect ownership interest with one or more parties. The term “Shell interest” is used for convenience to indicate the direct and/or indirect ownership interest held by Shell in an entity or unincorporated joint arrangement, after exclusion of all third-party interest.

The contents of websites referred to in this announcement do not form part of this announcement.

LEI number of Shell plc: 21380068P1DRHMJ8KU70
Classification: Additional regulated information required to be disclosed under the laws of a Member State

The MIL Network –

January 25, 2025

MIL-OSI Russia: “Science is international and aimed at the benefit of all mankind”

Translation. Region: Russian Federation –

Source: State University Higher School of Economics – State University Higher School of Economics –

Sharing research results

This year, our International Center for Decision Analysis and Choice at the National Research University Higher School of Economics celebrates its 15th anniversary. This HSE division carries out work that is at the forefront of scientific research in various fields, and we also interact a lot with various universities around the world. And almost every year we hold schools such as the autumn school “Advances in Decision Analysis”. Its goal is for scientists to learn what is being done in science around the world. Science is not Russian or American, English, science is international, it is aimed at the benefit of all humanity. We must constantly exchange research results. And within the framework of the school, we receive the very latest scientific work of the highest level. This is of great importance for our students and teachers. Lagging behind is dangerous, and our school exists to prevent it.

Comfortable format

The online format is convenient for our school. During Covid, we mastered this technology because people could not travel. In the current political situation, there are also restrictions, but the respect for our school is very high, so many foreign colleagues agreed to give presentations online. As part of the autumn school, we made several broadcasts on the Internet, which were joined by participants from various universities in Russia and around the world.

List of speakers

The first speaker was Professor Arunava Sen, one of India’s leading scientists who works at the Indian Statistical Institute. Some schools in India have an excess supply of teachers, while others have a shortage, and the speaker explained how to effectively reassign teachers, taking into account their wishes and the needs of the schools. Then Ahmed Alkan from Sabanci University, Turkey, one of the largest specialists in the field of generalized matchings, spoke – also completely new work related to representing these matchings in the form of lattices. The next speaker, Mario Guarracino from the University of Cassino, Italy, gave an amazing overview of neural network analysis methods and how neural networks operate. Eric Maskin, an employee of our center and a Nobel laureate, also spoke; I was delighted by his work on classical voting models. But he made very significant progress here. Alexey Myachin, also our employee, gave a report on completely new models in pattern analysis. This is a direction that has been developing for us for 20 years. Very high-quality new results have been obtained. The next talk is by Michel Grabisch from the Panthéon-Sorbonne University in Paris, who spoke about the possibility of generating linear orders. Then Vladimir Makarenkov, head of the bioinformatics department at the University of Quebec in Montreal, Canada, spoke about bioinformatics and practical applications. One of the world’s leading experts in the field of data analysis, Boris Mirkin, also spoke, who spoke about new models of K-means algorithms for data analysis. Colleagues from Sberbank Dzhangir Dzhangirov and Andrey Vashevnik spoke about large linguistic models and new visions for risk assessments.

Please note: This information is raw content directly from the source of the information. It is exactly what the source states and does not reflect the position of MIL-OSI or its clients.

MIL OSI Russia News –

January 25, 2025
MIL-OSI United Kingdom: Healthcare awareness campaign launched

Source: Scottish Government

Where to seek help over winter.

An awareness campaign is underway to ensure people know the best place to access healthcare this winter.

Right Care Right Place helps the public decide the most appropriate service for their healthcare needs – whether they should contact their GP or pharmacy, call NHS 24 on 111 or use self-help guides on the NHS Inform website. Hospital emergency departments should only be visited for critical emergencies.

The campaign features targeted advertising on television, radio and online and aims to help alleviate pressures on the NHS and social care ahead of an expected seasonal increase in demand.

Health Secretary Neil Gray visited East Lothian Community Hospital to hear about work being undertaken to address delayed discharges. The hospital supports patients leaving acute hospitals who require intermediate care before returning home.

Mr Gray said:

“We have been working closely with colleagues across the NHS and social care to make sure we are as prepared as possible ahead of winter.

“Public information and awareness of the treatment options and how to access them when needed is key to ensuring services are directed where they are most needed.

“This will help everyone to get the right care, in the right place as quickly as possible while helping alleviate pressures on the rest of the NHS. People can also help by making sure they receive their Respiratory Syncytial Virus (RSV), Covid-19 and flu vaccinations if eligible.”

Background

Self-help guides can be found on NHS inform and include advice on the most common winter illnesses.

Health and social care: winter preparedness plan 2024 to 2025 – gov.scot (www.gov.scot)

MIL OSI United Kingdom –

January 25, 2025
MIL-OSI United Kingdom: Autumn Budget 2024 speech

Source: United Kingdom – Executive Government & Departments

Autumn Budget 2024 speech as delivered by Chancellor Rachel Reeves.

Delivered on:

30 October 2024 (Transcript of the speech, exactly as it was delivered)

Madam Deputy Speaker…

[redacted political content]

This government was given a mandate.

To restore stability to our economy…

… and to begin a decade of national renewal.

To fix the foundations…

… and deliver change.

Through responsible leadership in the national interest.

That is our task.

And I know that we can achieve it.

My belief in Britain burns brighter than ever.

And the prize on offer is immense.

As my Right Honourable Friend the Prime Minister said on Monday – change must be felt.

More pounds in people’s pockets.

An NHS that is there when you need it.

An economy that is growing, creating wealth and opportunity for all…

… because that is the only way to improve living standards.

And the only way to drive economic growth…

… is to invest, invest, invest.

There are no shortcuts.

And to deliver that investment…

… we must restore economic stability…

[redacted political content]

INHERITANCE

[redacted political content]

… it is the first Budget in our country’s history to be delivered by a woman.

I am deeply proud to be Britain’s first ever female Chancellor of the Exchequer.

To girls and young women everywhere, I say:

Let there be no ceiling on your ambition, your hopes and your dreams.

And along with the pride that I feel standing here today…

… there is also a responsibility…

… to pass on a fairer society and a stronger economy to the next

generation of women.

[redacted political content]

A black hole in the public finances…

Public services on their knees….

A decade of low growth.

And the worst parliament on record for living standards.

Let me begin with the public finances.

In July, I exposed a £22bn black hole

[redacted political content]

The Treasury’s reserve, set aside for genuine emergencies…

… spent three times over…

… just three months into the financial year.

Today, on top of the detailed document that I have provided to the House in July…

… the government is publishing a line by line breakdown of the £22bn black hole that we inherited…

It shows hundreds of unfunded pressures on the public finances…

… this year, and into the future too.

The Office for Budget Responsibility have published their own review of the circumstances around the Spring Budget forecast.

They say that the previous government – and I quote – “did not provide the OBR with all the [available] information to them”…

… and – had they known about these “undisclosed spending pressures that have since come to light”…

… then their Spring Budget forecast for spending would have been, and I quote again: “materially different”.

Let me be clear: that means any comparison between today’s forecast and the OBR’s March forecast is false…

… because the party opposite hid the reality of their public spending plans.

Yet at the very same budget…

… they made another ten billion pounds worth of cuts to National Insurance.

[redacted political content]

That’s why today, I can confirm that we will implement in full…

… the 10 recommendations from the independent Office for Budget Responsibility’s review.

But, the country has inherited not just broken public finances…

… but broken public services too.

The British people can see and feel that in their everyday lives.

NHS waiting lists at record levels.

Children in portacabins as school roofs crumble.

Trains that do not arrive.

Rivers filled with polluted waste.

Prisons overflowing.

Crimes which are not investigated…

… and criminals who are not punished.

That is the country’s inheritance

Since 2021, there had been no detailed plans for departmental spending set out beyond this year.

And [redacted political content] plans relied on a baseline for spending this year which we now know was wrong…

… because it did not take into account the £22bn black hole.

The previous government also failed to budget for costs which they knew would materialise.

That includes funding for vital compensation schemes…

… for victims of two terrible injustices…

[redacted political content]

… the infected blood scandal…

… and the Post Office Horizon scandal.

The Leader of the Opposition rightly made an unequivocal apology for the injustice of the infected blood scandal on behalf of the British state…

… but he did not budget for the costs of compensation.

Today, for the very first time, we will provide specific funding to compensate those infected and those affected, in full…

… with £11.8bn in this budget.

And I am also today setting aside £1.8bn to compensate victims of the Post Office Horizon scandal…

… redress that is long overdue for the pain and injustice that they have suffered.

[redacted political content]

… and we will restore stability to our country again.

The scale and seriousness of the situation that we have inherited cannot be underestimated.

Together, the hole in our public finances this year, which recurs every year…

… the compensation schemes that they did not fund…

… and their failure to assess the scale of the challenges facing our public services…

… means this budget raises taxes by £40bn.

Any Chancellor standing here today would have to face this reality.

And any responsible Chancellor would take action.

That is why today, I am restoring stability to our public finances…

… and rebuilding our public services.

FISCAL RULES / OBR FORECASTS

Economy forecast/growth

As a former economist at the Bank of England, I know what it means to respect our economic institutions.

I want to put on record my thanks to the Governor of the Bank, Andrew Bailey…

… and to the independent Monetary Policy Committee.

Today, I can confirm that we will maintain the MPC’s target of two per cent inflation, as measured by the 12-month increase in the Consumer Prices Index.

I want to thank James Bowler, the Permanent Secretary to the Treasury, and my team of officials.

Madam Deputy Speaker, I would also like to thank my predecessors as Chancellor of the Exchequer…

… for their wise counsel as I have prepared for this Budget.

[redacted political content]

Finally, I want to thank Richard Hughes and his team at the Office for Budget Responsibility for their work in preparing today’s economic and fiscal outlook.

Let me now take the House through that forecast.

The cost of living crisis under the last government stretched household finances to their limit, with inflation hitting a peak of above 11%.

Today, the OBR say that CPI inflation will average 2.5% this year, 2.6% in 2025, then 2.3% in 2026, 2.1% in 2027, 2.1% in 2028 and 2.0% in 2029.

Next, I move on to economic growth.

Today’s budget marks an end to short-termism.

So I am pleased, that for the first time, the OBR have published not only five year growth forecasts…

… but a detailed assessment of the growth impacts of our policies over the next decade, too…

… and the new Charter for Budget Responsibility, which I am publishing today, confirms that this will become a permanent feature of our framework.

The OBR forecast that real GDP growth will be 1.1% in 2024, 2.0% in 2025, 1.8% in 2026, 1.5% in 2027, 1.5% in 2028 and 1.6% in 2029.

And the OBR are clear: this Budget will permanently increase the supply capacity of the economy…

[redacted political content]

… boosting long-term growth.

Every Budget I deliver will be focused on our mission to grow the economy.

And underpinning that mission are the seven key pillars of our growth strategy…

… developed and delivered alongside business…

… all driven forward by our Financial Secretary to the Treasury.

First, and most important, is to restore economic stability. That is my focus today.

Second, increasing investment and building new infrastructure is vital for productivity, so we are catalysing £70bn of investment through our National Wealth Fund…

… and we are transforming our planning rules to get Britain building again.

Third, to ensure that all parts of the UK can realise their potential…

… we are working with the devolved governments…

… and partnering with our Mayors to develop local growth plans.

Fourth, to improve employment prospects and skills we are creating Skills England, delivering our plans to Make Work Pay and tackling economic inactivity.

Fifth, we are launching our long-term modern industrial strategy and expanding opportunities for our small and medium sized businesses to grow.

Sixth, to drive innovation we are protecting record funding for research and development to harness the full potential of the UK’s science base.

And finally, to maximise the growth benefits of our clean energy mission, we have confirmed key investments such as Carbon Capture and Storage to create jobs in our industrial heartlands.

Our approach is already having an impact.

Just two weeks ago – we delivered an International Investment Summit which saw businesses commit £63.5bn of investment into this country…

… creating nearly 40,000 jobs across the United Kingdom.

[redacted political content]

Economic growth will be our mission for the duration of this parliament.

Stability rule

Madam Deputy Speaker, in our manifesto, we set out the fiscal rules that would guide this government.

I am confirming those today…

Our stability rule…

And our investment rule…

The “stability rule” means that we will bring the current budget into balance…

… so that we do not borrow to fund day to day spending.

We will meet this rule in 2029-30, until that becomes the third year of the forecast.

From then on, we will balance the current budget in the third year of every budget, held annually each autumn.

That will provide a tougher constraint on day to day spending…

… so difficult decisions cannot be constantly delayed or deferred.

The OBR say that the current budget will be in deficit by £26.2bn in 2025-26 and £5.2bn in 2026-27…

… before moving into surplus of £10.9bn in 2027-28, £9.3bn in 2028-29 and £9.9bn in 2029-30…

… meeting our stability rule…

… two years early.

Monthly public sector finances data shows that government borrowing in the first six months of this year…

… was already running significantly higher than the OBR’s March forecast.

And so the OBR confirmed today, that borrowing in this financial year is now £127bn…

[redacted political content]

The increase in the net cash requirement in 24-25 is lower than the increase in borrowing, at £22.3bn higher than the spring forecast.

Because of the action that we are taking…

… borrowing falls from 4.5% of GDP this year to 2.1% of GDP by the end of the forecast.

Public sector net borrowing will be £105.6bn in 2025-26, £88.5bn in 2026-27, £72.2bn in 2027-28, £71.9bn in 2028-29 and £70.6bn in 2029-2930.

FIXING THE FOUNDATIONS

Spending

Madam Deputy Speaker, before I come to tax…

… it is vital that we are driving efficiency and reducing wasteful spending.

In July, to begin delivering, and dealing with our inheritance…

… I made £5.5bn of savings this year.

Today we are setting a 2% productivity, efficiency and savings target for all departments to meet next year…

… by using technology more effectively and joining up services across government

As set out in our manifesto, I will shortly be appointing our Covid Corruption Commissioner, they will lead our work to uncover those companies that used a national emergency to line their own pockets.

Because that money belongs in our public services. And taxpayers want that money back.

And I can confirm today that David Goldstone has been appointed as the Chair of the new Office for Value for Money…

… to help us realise the benefits from every pound of public spending.

Welfare

Today, I am also taking three steps to ensure that welfare spending is more sustainable.

First, we inherited [redacted political content] plans to reform the Work Capability Assessment.

We will deliver those savings…

…as part of our fundamental reforms to the health and disability benefits system that my Right Honourable Friend the Work and Pensions Secretary will bring forward.

Second, I can today announce a crackdown on fraud in our welfare system…

… often the work of criminal gangs.

We will expand DWP’s counter-fraud teams..

… using innovative new methods to prevent illegal activity…

… and provide new legal powers to crackdown on fraudsters…

… including direct access to bank accounts to recover debt.

This package saves £4.3bn a year by the end of the forecast.

Third, the government will shortly be publishing the “Get Britain Working” white paper…

… tackling the root causes of inactivity with an integrated approach across health, education and welfare.

… and we will provide £240m for 16 trailblazer projects…

… targeted at those who are economically inactive and most at risk of being out of education, employment or training…

… to get people into work and reduce the benefits bill.

Tax avoidance

Before a government could consider any change to a tax rate or threshold…

… it must ensure that people pay what they already owe.

So we will invest to modernise HMRC’s systems using the very best technology…

… and recruit additional HMRC compliance and debt staff.

We will clamp down on those umbrella companies who exploit workers…

… increase the interest rate on unpaid tax debt to ensure that people pay on time…

… and go after promoters of tax avoidance schemes.

These measures to reduce the tax gap raise £6.5bn by the end of the forecast…

… and I want to thank the Exchequer Secretary for his outstanding work on this agenda.

PROTECTING WORKING PEOPLE

Madam Deputy Speaker, I know that for working people up and down our country…

… family finances are stretched…

… and pay checks don’t go as far as they once did.

So today, I am taking steps to support people with the cost of living.

Cost of living

[redacted political content]

As promised in our manifesto, we asked the Low Pay Commission to take account of the cost of living for the first time.

I can confirm that we will accept the Low Pay Commission recommendation to increase the National Living Wage by 6.7% to £12.21 an hour…

… worth up to £1,400 a year for a full-time worker.

And for the first time, we will move towards a single adult rate…

… phased in over time…

… by initially increasing the National Minimum Wage for 18-20 year olds by 16.3% as recommended by the Low Pay Commission…

… taking it to £10 an hour.

[redacted political content]

Second, I have heard representations from colleagues across this house about the Carer’s Allowance…

… and the impact of the current policy on carers looking to increase the hours they work…

… including from the Honourable member for Shipley, the Honourable member for Scarborough and Whitby and the Rt Hon Member for Kingston and Surbiton, too.

Carer’s allowance currently provides up to £81.90 per week to help those with additional caring responsibilities.

Today, I can confirm that we are increasing the weekly earnings limit to the equivalent of 16 hours at the National Living Wage per week…

… the largest increase in Carer’s Allowance since it was introduced in 1976.

That means a carer can now earn over £10,000 a year while receiving Carer’s Allowance…

… allowing them to increase their hours where they want to…

… and keep more of their money.

I am also concerned about the cliff-edge in the current system and the issue of overpayments.

My Right Honourable Friend the Work and Pensions Secretary has announced an independent review to look at the issue of overpayments, and we will work across this house to develop the right solutions.

Third, we will provide £1bn from next year to extend the Household Support Fund and Discretionary Housing Payments, to help those facing financial hardship with the cost of essentials.

Fourth, having heard representations from the Joseph Rowntree Foundation, Trussell and others…

… to reduce the level of debt repayments that can be taken from a household’s Universal Credit payment each month…

… by reducing it from 25% to 15% of their standard allowance.

This means that 1.2 million of the poorest households will keep more of their award each month…

… lifting children out of poverty…

… and those who benefit will gain an average of £420 a year.

Madam Deputy Speaker, our Plan to Make Work Pay will also protect working people.

[redacted political content]

It is right that we protect those who have worked their whole lives.

In our manifesto, we promised to transfer the Investment Reserve Fund in the Mineworkers’ Pension Scheme to members…

… and I have listened closely to my Honourable Friends for Easington, Doncaster Central, Blaenau Gwent, and Ayr, Carrick and Cumnock on this issue.

Today we are keeping our promise…

… so that working people who powered our country receive the fair pension that they are owed.

Our manifesto committed to the Triple Lock…

… meaning spending on the State Pension is forecast to rise by over £31bn by 2029-30…

… to ensure that our pensioners are protected in their retirement.

This commitment means that while working age benefits will be uprated in line with CPI, at 1.7%…

… the basic and new State Pension…

… will be uprated by 4.1% in 2025-26.

This means that over 12 million pensioners will gain up to £470 next year…

… up to £275 more than if uprated by inflation.

The Pension Credit Standard Minimum Guarantee will also rise by 4.1%…

… from around £11,400 per year to around £11,850 for a single pensioner.

Fuel duty

While I have sought to protect working people with measures to reduce the cost of living…

… I have had to take some very difficult decisions on tax.

I want to set out my approach to fuel duty.

Baked into the numbers that I inherited from the previous government…

… is an assumption that fuel duty will rise by RPI next year…

… and that the temporary 5p cut will be reversed.

To retain the 5p cut…

… and to freeze fuel duty again…

… would cost over £3bn next year.

At a time when the fiscal position is so difficult…

… I have to be frank with the House that this is a substantial commitment to make.

I have concluded…

… that in these difficult circumstances…

… while the cost of living remains high…

… and with a backdrop of global uncertainty…

… increasing fuel duty next year…

… would be the wrong choice for working people.

It would mean fuel duty rising by 7p per litre.

So, I have today decided to freeze fuel duty next year…

… and I will maintain the existing 5p cut for another year, too.

There will be no higher taxes at the petrol pumps next year.

Madam Deputy Speaker, the last government made cuts of £20bn to employees’ and self-employed national insurance in their final two budgets.

[redacted political content]

Because we now know they were based on a forecast which the OBR say would have been “materially different”…

… had they known the true extent of the last government’s cover-up.

Since July, I have been urged on multiple occasions to reconsider these cuts.

To increase the taxes that working people pay and see in their payslips.

But I have made an important choice today:

To keep every single commitment that we made on tax in our manifesto.

So I say to working people:

I will not increase your National Insurance…

…I will not increase your VAT…

…And I will not increase your income tax.

Working people will not see higher taxes in their payslips as a result of the choices I make today.

That is a promise made – and a promise fulfilled.

TAX

But any responsible Chancellor would need to take difficult decisions today.

To raise the revenues required to fund our public services.

And to restore economic stability.

So in today’s Budget, I am announcing an increase in Employers’ National Insurance Contributions.

We will increase the rate of Employers’ National Insurance by 1.2 percentage points, to 15%, from April 2025.

And we will reduce the Secondary Threshold – the level at which employers start paying national insurance on each employee’s salary – from £9,100 per year to £5,000.

This will raise £25bn per year by the end of the forecast period.

I know that this is a difficult choice.

I do not take this decision lightly.

We are asking business to contribute more…

… and I know that there will be impacts of this measure felt beyond businesses, too…

… as the OBR have set out today.

But in the circumstances that I have inherited, it is the right choice to make.

Successful businesses depend on successful schools.

Healthy businesses depend on a healthy NHS.

And a strong economy depends on strong public finances.

[redacted political content]

That is the choice our country faces too.

As I make this choice, I know it is particularly important to protect our smallest companies.

So having heard representations from the Federation of Small Businesses and others…

… I am today increasing the Employment Allowance from £5,000 to £10,500.

This means 865,000 employers won’t pay any National Insurance at all next year…

… and over 1 million will pay the same or less than they did previously.

This will allow a small business to employ the equivalent of 4 full time workers on the National Living Wage…

… without paying any National Insurance on their wages.

Madam Deputy Speaker, let me come now to capital gains tax.

We need to drive growth, promote entrepreneurship, and support wealth creation…

… while raising the revenue required to fund our public services…

… and restore our public finances.

Today, we will increase the lower rate of Capital Gains Tax from 10% to 18%, and the Higher Rate from 20% to 24%…

… while maintaining the rates of capital gains tax on residential property at 18% and 24%, too.

This means the UK will still have the lowest Capital Gains Tax rate of any European G7 economy.

Alongside these changes to the headline rates of Capital Gains Tax…

… we are maintaining the lifetime limit for Business Asset Disposal Relief at £1m…

… to encourage entrepreneurs to invest in their businesses.

Business Asset Disposal Relief will remain at 10% this year…

… before rising to 14% in April 2025…

… and 18% from 2026-27…

… maintaining a significant gap compared to the higher rate of Capital Gains Tax.

Together, the OBR say these measures will raise £2.5bn by the end of the forecast.

In a sign of this government’s commitment to supporting growth and entrepreneurship…

…we have already extended the Enterprise Investment Scheme and Venture Capital Trust schemes to 2035…

… and we will continue to work with leading entrepreneurs and venture capital firms…

… to ensure our policies support a positive environment for entrepreneurship in the UK.

Next, inheritance tax.

Only 6% of estates will pay inheritance tax this year.

I understand the strongly held desire to pass down savings to children and grandchildren.

So I am taking a balanced approach in my package today.

First, the previous government froze inheritance tax thresholds until 2028. I will extend that freeze for a further two years, until 2030.

That means the first £325,000 of any estate can be inherited tax-free…

… rising to £500,000 if the estate includes a residence passed to direct descendants….

… and £1m when a tax free allowance is passed to a surviving spouse or civil partner.

Second, we will close the loophole created by the previous government…

… made even bigger when the Lifetime Allowance was abolished…

… by bringing inherited pensions into inheritance tax from April 2027.

Finally, we will reform Agricultural Property Relief and Business Property Relief.

From April 2026, the first £1m of combined business and agricultural assets will continue to attract no inheritance tax at all…

… but for assets over £1m, inheritance tax will apply with 50% relief, at an effective rate of 20%.

This will ensure we continue to protect small family farms…

… and three-quarters of claims will be unaffected by these changes.

I can also announce that we will apply a 50% relief, in all circumstances, on inheritance tax for shares on the Alternative Investment Market (AIM) and other similar markets…

… setting the effective rate of tax at 20%.

Taken together, these measures raise over £2bn in the final year of the forecast.

Next, I can confirm that the government will renew the Tobacco Duty escalator for the remainder of this Parliament at RPI+2%…

… increase duty by a further 10% on hand-rolling tobacco this year…

… introduce a flat rate duty on all vaping liquid from October 2026…

… alongside an additional one off- increase in tobacco duty to maintain the incentive to give up smoking.

And we will increase the Soft Drinks Industry Levy to account for inflation since it was introduced…

… as well as increasing the duty in line with CPI each year going forward.

These measures will raise nearly £1bn per year by the end of the forecast period.

Madame Deputy Speaker, we want to support the take-up of electric vehicles.

So I will maintain incentives for electric vehicles in Company Car Tax from 2028…

… and increase the differential between fully electric and other vehicles in the first year rates of Vehicle Excise Duty from April 2025.

These measures will raise around £400m by the end of the forecast period.

Madam Deputy Speaker let me update the House on our plans for Air Passenger Duty…

[redacted political content]

Air Passenger Duty has not kept up with inflation in recent years…

… so we are introducing an adjustment…

… meaning an increase of no more than £2 for an economy class short-haul flight.

But I am taking a different approach when it comes to private jets…

… increasing the rate of Air Passenger Duty by a further 50%.

[redacted political content]

These measures will raise over £700m by the end of the forecast period.

Madam Deputy Speaker, let me turn now to our high street businesses.

I know that for them, a major source of concern is business rates.

From 2026-27, we intend to introduce two permanently lower tax rates for retail, hospitality and leisure properties which make up the backbone of high streets across the country…

… and it is our intention that is paid for by a higher multiplier for the most valuable properties.

[redacted political content]

So I will today provide 40% relief on business rates for the retail, hospitality and leisure industry in 2025-26…

… up to a cap of £110,000 per business.

Alongside this, the small business tax multiplier will be frozen next year.

Next, I can confirm that alcohol duty rates on non-draught products will increase in line with RPI from February next year…

… but nearly two-thirds of alcoholic drinks sold in pubs are served on draught.

So today, instead of uprating these products in line with inflation…

… I am cutting draught duty by 1.7%…

… which means a penny off a pint in the pub.

Alongside the changes I am making today, I am publishing a Corporate Tax Roadmap..

… providing the business certainty called for by the CBI, British Chambers of Commerce and the Institute for Directors.

This confirms our commitment to cap the rate of Corporation Tax at 25% – the lowest in the G7 – for the duration of this parliament….

… while maintaining full expensing and the £1 million Annual Investment Allowance…

…and keeping the current rates of research and development reliefs, to drive innovation.

Manifesto

Madam Deputy Speaker, in our manifesto we made a number of commitments to raise funding for our public services.

First, I have always said that if you make Britain your home, you should pay your tax here.

So today, I can confirm…

… we will abolish the non-dom tax regime…

… and remove the outdated concept of domicile from the tax system from April 2025.

We will introduce a new, residence based scheme…

… with internationally competitive arrangements for those coming to the UK on a temporary basis…

… while closing the loopholes in the scheme designed by the party opposite.

To further encourage investment into the UK, we will also extend the Temporary Repatriation Relief to three years and expand its scope…

… bringing billions of pounds of new funds into Britain.

The independent Office for Budget Responsibility say that this package of measures will raise £12.7bn over the next five years.

Next, the fund management industry provides a vital contribution to our economy…

… but as our manifesto set out, there needs to be a fairer approach to the way carried interest is taxed.

So we will increase the Capital Gains Tax rates on carried interest to 32% from April 2025…

… and – from April 2026 – we will deliver further reforms to ensure that the specific rules for carried interest are simpler, fairer and better targeted.

In our manifesto we committed to reforming stamp duty land tax to raise revenue while supporting those buying their first home.

We are increasing the stamp-duty land tax surcharge for second-homes…

…known as the “Higher Rate for Additional Dwellings”…

… by 2 percentage points, to 5%, which will come into effect from tomorrow.

This will support over 130,000 additional transactions from people buying their first home, or moving home over, the next five years.

Next, we committed to reform the Energy Profits Levy on oil and gas companies.

I can confirm today that we will increase the rate of the levy to 38%, which will now expire in March 2030…

… and we will remove the 29% investment allowance.

To ensure the oil and gas industry can protect jobs and support our energy security…

… we will maintain the 100% first year allowances and the decarbonisation allowances too.

Finally, 94% of children in the UK attend state schools.

To provide the highest quality of support and teaching that they deserve…

… we will introduce VAT on private school fees from January 2025…

… and we will shortly introduce legislation to remove their business rates relief from April 2025, too.

We said in our manifesto that these changes…

… alongside our measures to tackle tax avoidance…

… would bring in £8.5bn by the final year of the forecast.

I can confirm today that they will in fact raise over £9bn…

… to support our public services and restore our public finances.

That is a promise made – and a promise fulfilled.

Madam Deputy Speaker, I have one final decision to take on tax today.

The previous government froze income tax and National Insurance thresholds in 2021…

… and then they did so again after the mini-budget.

Extending their threshold freeze for a further two years raises billions of pounds.

Money to deal with the black hole in our public finances…

… and repair our public services.

Having considered this issue closely…

… I have come to the conclusion…

… that extending the threshold freeze…

… would hurt working people.

It would take more money out of their payslips.

I am keeping every single promise on tax that I made in our manifesto.

So there will be no extension of the freeze in income tax and National Insurance thresholds beyond the decisions of the previous government.

From 2028-29, personal tax thresholds will be uprated in line with inflation once again.

When it comes to choices on tax, this government chooses to protect working people every single time.

SPENDING

Madam Deputy Speaker, these are the choices I have made.

To restore economic stability.

And to protect working people.

The next choice I make is to begin to repair our public services.

In recent months, we have conducted the first phase of the Spending Review…

… to set departmental budgets for 2024-25 and 2025-26…

… and I want to thank my Right Honourable Friend the Chief Secretary to the Treasury for his tireless work with colleagues from across government.

Because I have taken difficult decisions on tax today…

… I am able to provide an injection of immediate funding over the next two years…

… to stabilise and to support our public services.

The next phase of the Spending Review will report in late Spring, and I have set the overall envelope today.

Day to day spending from 2024-25 onwards will grow by 1.5% in real terms…

… and total departmental spending, including capital spending, will grow by 1.7% in real terms.

At the election we promised there would be no return to austerity.

Today we deliver on that promise.

But given the scale of the challenges that are facing our public services…

… that means there will still be difficult choices in the next phase of the Spending Review.

Just as we cannot tax and spend our way to prosperity…

… nor can we simply spend our way to better public services.

So we will deliver a new approach to public service reform…

… using technology to improve public services…

… and taking a zero-based approach…

… so that taxpayers’ money is spent as effectively as possible…

… and so that we focus on delivering our key priorities.

Spending Review: Phase 1

In the first phase of the Spending Review…

… I have prioritised day-to-day funding to deliver on our manifesto commitments.

I want every child to have the best start in life…

… and the best possible start to the school day, too…

… and I know my Right Honourable Friend the Education Secretary shares my ambition.

So I am today tripling investment in breakfast clubs to fund them in thousands of schools.

I am increasing the core schools budget by £2.3bn next year…

… to support our pledge to hire thousands more teachers into key subjects.

So that our young people can develop the skills that they need for the future…

… I am providing an additional £300m for further education.

And finally, this government is committed to reforming special educational needs provision…

… to improve outcomes for our most vulnerable children and ensure the system is financially sustainable.

To support that work, I am today providing a £1bn uplift in funding, a 6% real terms increase from this year.

There is no more important job for government than to keep our country safe, and we are conducting a Strategic Defence Review to be published next year.

And as set out in our manifesto, we will set a path to spending 2.5% of GDP on defence at a future fiscal event.

Today, I am announcing a total increase to the Ministry of Defence’s Budget of £2.9bn next year…

… ensuring the UK comfortably exceeds our NATO commitments…

… and providing guaranteed military support to Ukraine of £3bn per year, for as long as it takes.

Last week, alongside my Right Honourable Friend the Defence Secretary, I announced, in addition to this, further support to Ukraine – on top of our NATO commitment…

… through our £2.26bn contribution to the G7’s Extraordinary Revenue Acceleration agreement…

… repaid using profits from immobilised Russian sovereign assets.

And as we approach Remembrance Sunday…

… it is vital that we take time to remember those who have served our country so bravely.

So I am today announcing funding to commemorate the 80th anniversary of VE and VJ day next year…

… to honour those who have served at home and abroad.

We must also remember those who experienced the atrocities of the Nazi regime first hand.

I would like to pay tribute to Lily Ebert, the Holocaust Survivor and educator who passed away aged 100 earlier this month.

I am today committing a further £2m to holocaust education next year…

… so that charities like the Holocaust Educational Trust, can continue their work to ensure these vital testimonies are not lost and are preserved for the future.

Madam Deputy Speaker, to repair our public services we also need to work alongside our mayors and our local leaders.

We will deliver a significant real-terms funding increase for local government next year…

… including £1.3bn of additional grant funding to deliver essential services…

… with at least £600m in grant funding for social care…

… and £230m to tackle homelessness and rough sleeping

We are today confirming that Greater Manchester and the West Midlands will be the first mayoral authorities to receive integrated settlements from next year…

… giving Mayors meaningful control of the funding for their local areas.

*

And to support our local high streets…

… we are taking action to deal with the sharp rise in shoplifting we have seen in recent years.

We will scrap the effective immunity for low-value shoplifting introduced by the party opposite.

And having listened closely to organisations like the British Retail Consortium and USDAW…

… I am providing additional funding to crack down on the organised gangs which target retailers…

… and to provide more training to our police officers and retailers to help stop shoplifting in its tracks.

Finally, I am today providing funding to support public services and drive growth across Scotland, Wales and Northern Ireland.

Having discussed the matter with the First Minister of Wales, Eluned Morgan, and my HFs for Llanelli and Pontypridd…

… I am providing a £25m to the Welsh Government next year for the maintenance of coal tips to ensure we keep our communities safe.

And to support growth, including in our rural areas, we will proceed with City and Growth Deals in Northern Ireland…

… in Causeway Coast and Glens; and Mid-South West.

And we will drive growth in Scotland [redacted political content] including a City and growth Deal in Argyll and Bute.

This budget provides the devolved governments with the largest real-terms funding settlement since devolution…

… delivering an additional £3.4 billion for the Scottish Government through the Barnett formula…

… funding which must now be spent effectively to improve public services in Scotland.

This budget also provides £1.7 billion to the Welsh Government…

… and £1.5 billion to the Northern Ireland Executive in 2025-26.

I said there would be no return to austerity, and that is the choice I have made today.

REBUILDING BRITAIN

Madam Deputy Speaker, to rebuild our country we need to increase investment.

The UK lags behind every other G7 country when it comes to business investment as a share of our economy.

That matters.

It means the UK has fallen behind in the race for new jobs…

… new industries…

… and new technology.

By restoring economic stability…

… and by establishing the National Wealth Fund to catalyse private funding…

… we have begun to create the conditions that businesses need to invest.

But there is also a significant role for public investment.

Hospitals without the equipment they need.

School buildings not fit for our children.

A desperate lack of affordable housing.

Economic growth held back at every turn.

Under the plans I inherited…

… public investment was set to fall from 2.5% to 1.7% of GDP.

But in Washington last week, the International Monetary Fund were clear:

More public investment is badly needed in the UK.

So today, having listened to the case made by the former Governor of the Bank of England, Mark Carney…

… former Treasury Minister, Jim O’Neill…

… and the former Cabinet Secretary, Gus O’Donnell…

… among others…

… I am confirming our investment rule.

As set out in our manifesto, we will target debt falling as a share of the economy.

Debt will be defined as Public Sector net Financial Liabilities, or “net financial debt”, for short…

… a metric that has been measured by the Office for National Statistics since 2016…

… and forecast by the Office for Budget Responsibility since that date too.

“Net financial debt” recognises that government investment delivers returns for taxpayers…

… by counting not just the liabilities on a government’s balance sheet, but the financial assets too.

This means that we count the benefits of investment, not just the costs…

And we free up our institutions to invest…

… just as they do in Germany, France and Japan.

Like our stability rule, our investment rule will apply in 2029-2030…

… until that becomes the third year of the forecast.

From that point onwards, net financial debt will fall in the third year of every forecast.

Today, the OBR say that we are already meeting our target two years early…

… with “net financial debt” falling by 2027-28…

… with £15.7bn of headroom in the final year.

So that we drive the right incentives in government investments…

… we will introduce four key guardrails to ensure capital spending is good value for money and drives growth in our economy.

First, our portfolio of new financial investments will be delivered by expert bodies like the National Wealth Fund which must, by default, earn a rate of return at least as large as that on gilts.

Second, we will strengthen the role of institutions to improve infrastructure delivery.

Third, we will improve certainty, setting capital budgets for five years and extending them at every spending review every two years.

Finally, we will ensure there is greater transparency for capital spending, with robust annual reporting of financial investments…

… based on accounts audited by the National Audit Office…

… and made available to the Office for Budget Responsibility at every forecast.

Taken together with our stability rule…

…these fiscal rules will ensure that our public finances are on a firm footing…

… while enabling us to invest prudently alongside business.

Growth projects

The capital plans I now set out…

… to drive growth across our country…

… and repair the fabric of our nation…

… are only possible because of our investment rule.

Let me set out those investment plans.

Industrial strategy

Today we are confirming our plans to capitalise the National Wealth Fund…

… to invest in the industries of the future…

… from gigafactories, to ports to green hydrogen.

Building on these investments, my Right Honourable Friend the Business Secretary is driving forward our modern industrial strategy…

… working with businesses and organisations like Make UK…

… to set out the sectors with the biggest growth potential.

Today, we are confirming multi-year funding commitments for these areas of our economy, including…

… nearly £1bn for the aerospace sector to fund vital research and development, building on our industry in the East Midlands, the South-West and Scotland…

… over £2 billion for the automotive sector…

… to support our electric vehicle industry and develop our manufacturing base…

… building on our strengths in the North East and the West Midlands…

And up to £520m for a new Life Sciences Innovative Manufacturing Fund.

For our world-leading creative industries…

… we will legislate to provide additional tax relief for visual effect costs in TV and film…

.. and we are providing £25m for the North East Combined Authority…

… which they plan to use to remediate the Crown Works Studio site in Sunderland…

… creating 8,000 new jobs.

Research & Development

To unlock these growth industries of the future, we will protect government investment in research and development with more than £20bn worth of funding.

This includes at least £6.1bn to protect core research funding for areas like engineering, biotechnology and medical science…

…through Research England, other research councils, and the National Academies.

We will extend the Innovation Accelerators programme in Glasgow, in Manchester and in the West Midlands.

And with over £500m of funding next year, my Right Honourable Friend the Science, Technology and Innovation Secretary, will continue to drive progress in improving reliable, fast broadband and mobile coverage across our country, including in rural areas.

Housing

We committed in our manifesto to build 1.5 million homes over the course of this parliament…

… and my Right Honourable Friend the Deputy Prime Minister is driving that work forward across government.

Today, I am providing over £5bn of government investment to deliver our plans on housing next year.

We will increase the Affordable Homes Programme to £3.1bn…

… delivering thousands of new homes.

We will provide £3bn of support in guarantees…

… to boost the supply of homes and support our small housebuilders.

And we will provide investment to renovate sites across our country…

… including at Liverpool Central Docks…

… where we will deliver 2,000 new homes…

… and funding to help Cambridge realise its full growth potential.

Alongside this investment, we will put the right policies in place to increase the supply of affordable housing.

Having heard representations from local authorities, social housing providers and from Shelter…

… I can today confirm that the government will reduce Right to Buy Discounts…

… and local authorities will be able to retain the full receipts from any sales of social housing…

… to reinvest back into the housing stock, and into new supply..

… so that we give more people a safe, secure and affordable place to live.

We will provide stability to social housing providers, with a social housing rent settlement of CPI+1 percent for the next five years.

And we will deliver on our manifesto commitment to hire hundreds of new planning officers, to get Britain building again.

We will also make progress on our commitment to accelerate the remediation of homes following the findings of the Grenfell Inquiry…

… with £1bn of investment to remove dangerous cladding next year.

Transport

Working with my Right Honourable Friend the Transport Secretary, I am changing that.

We are today securing the delivery of the Trans-Pennine upgrade to connect York, Leeds, Huddersfield and Manchester…

… delivering fully electric local and regional services between Manchester and Stalybridge by the end of this year…

… with a further electrification of services between Church Fenton and York by 2026.…

… to help grow our economy across the North of England…

… with faster and more reliable services.

We will deliver East-West Rail to drive growth between Oxford, Milton Keynes and Cambridge…

… with the first services running between Oxford, Bletchley and Milton Keynes next year…

… and trains between Oxford and Bedford running from 2030.

We are delivering railway schemes which improve journeys for people across our country…

… including upgrades at Bradford Forster Square…

… improving capacity at Manchester Victoria…

… and electrifying the Wigan-Bolton line.

My Right Honourable Friend the Transport Secretary has also set out a plan for how to get a grip of HS2.

Today, we are securing delivery of the project between Old Oak Common and Birmingham…

… and we are committing the funding required to begin tunnelling work to London Euston station…

… This will catalyse private investment into the local area.

I am also funding significant improvements to our roads network.

For too long, potholes have been an all too visible reminder of our failure to invest as a nation.

Today, that changes…

… with a £500m increase in road maintenance budgets next year…

… more than delivering on our manifesto commitment to fix an additional one million potholes each year.

We will provide over £650m of local transport funding to improve connections across our country…

… in our towns like Crewe and Grimsby…

… and in our villages and rural areas, from Cornwall to Cumbria.

… we understand how important bus services are for our communities…

…so we will extend the cap for a further year, setting it at £3 until December 2025.

Finally we will deliver £1.3bn of funding to improve connectivity in our city regions, funding projects like…

… the Brierley Hill Metro extension in the West Midlands…

… the renewal of the Sheffield Supertram…

… and West Yorkshire Mass Transit, including in Bradford and Leeds.

Energy

Madam Deputy Speaker, to bring new jobs to Britain and drive growth across our country…

… we are delivering our mission to make Britain a clean energy superpower, led by my Right Honourable Friend the Energy Secretary.

Earlier this month, we announced a significant multi-year investment between government and business into Carbon Capture and Storage…

… creating 4,000 jobs across Merseyside and Teesside.

Today, I am providing funding for 11 new green hydrogen projects across England, Scotland and Wales – they will be among the first commercial scale projects anywhere in the world…

… including in Bridgend, East Renfrewshire and in Barrow-in-Furness

We are kickstarting the Warm Homes Plan by confirming an initial £3.4bn over the next three years…

… to transform 350,000 homes…

… including a quarter of a million low-income and social homes.

And we will establish GB Energy…

… providing funding next year to set up GB Energy at its new home in Aberdeen.

Overall, we will invest an additional £100bn over the next five years in capital spending…

… only possible because of our investment rule.

The OBR say today that this will drive growth across our country in the next five years…

… and in the longer term increase GDP by up to 1.4%.

It will crowd in private investment…

… meaning more jobs, and more opportunities…

… in every corner of the UK.

That is the choice that I have made.

To invest in our country…

… and to grow our economy.

Today, I am setting out two final areas in which investment is so badly needed…

… to repair the fabric of our nation.

Schools

[redacted political content]

… schools roofs are crumbling….

… and millions of children are facing the very same backdrop as I did.

I will be the Chancellor that changes that.

So today, I am providing £6.7bn of capital investment to the Department for Education next year…

… a 19% real-terms increase on this year.

That includes £1.4bn to rebuild over 500 schools in the greatest need…

… including St Helen’s Primary School in Hartlepool, and Mercia Academy in Derby…

… and so many more across our country.

And we will provide a further £2.1bn to improve school maintenance, £300m more than this year…

… ensuring that all our children can learn somewhere safe…

… including dealing with RAAC affected schools in the constituencies of my HFs the members for Watford, Stourbridge, Hyndburn, and beyond.

Alongside investment in new teachers…

… and funding for thousands of new breakfast clubs…

… this government is giving our children and young people the opportunities that they deserve.

NHS

Madam Deputy Speaker, I come to our most cherished public service of all: our NHS.

[redacted political content]

In our first week in office, he commissioned an independent report into the state of our health service by Lord Darzi.

Its conclusions were damning.

While our NHS staff do a remarkable job, and we thank them for it…

… it is clear that, that in so many areas…

… we are moving in the wrong direction.

100,000 infants waited over 6 hours in A&E last year.

350,000 people are waiting a year for mental health support.

Cancer deaths here are higher than in other countries.

It is simply unforgiveable.

In the Spring, we will publish a 10 year plan for the NHS…

… to deliver a shift from hospital to community…

… from analogue to digital…

… and from sickness to prevention.

Today, we are announcing a downpayment on that plan…

… to enable the NHS to deliver 2% productivity growth next year.

These reforms are vital.

But we should be honest.

The state of the NHS we inherited…

… after – and I quote Lord Darzi – “the most austere decade since the NHS was founded” –

… means reform must come alongside investment.

So today…

… because of the difficult decision that I have taken on tax, welfare and spending…

… I can announce…

… that I am providing a £22.6bn increase in the day to-day health budget…

… and a £3.1bn increase in the capital budget…

… over this year and next year.

This is the largest real-terms growth in day to day NHS spending outside of Covid since 2010.

Let me set out what this funding is delivering.

Many NHS buildings have been left in a state of disrepair.

So we will provide £1 billion of health capital investment next year to address the backlog of repairs and upgrades across the NHS.

To increase capacity for tens of thousands more procedures next year…

… we will provide a further £1.5bn…

… for new beds in hospitals across the country…

… new capacity for over a million additional diagnostic tests…

… and new surgical hubs and diagnostic centres …

… so that those people waiting for their treatment can get it as quickly as possible.

My Right Honourable Friend the Health Secretary will be announcing the details of his review into the New Hospital Programme in the coming weeks…

… and publishing in the new year…

… but I can tell the House today…

… that work will continue at pace to deliver those seven hospitals affected including…

… West Suffolk Hospital in Bury St Edmunds…

… and Leighton Hospital in Crewe.

And finally…

… because of this record injection of funding…

… because of the thousands of additional beds that we have secured…

… and because of the reforms that we are delivering in our NHS…

… we can now begin to bring waiting lists down more quickly…

… and move towards our target for waiting times no longer than 18 weeks…

… by delivering our manifesto commitment for 40,000 extra hospital appointments a week.

[redacted political content]

CLOSING

Madam Deputy Speaker, the choices that I have made today are the right choices for our country.

To restore stability to our public finances.

To protect working people.

To fix our NHS.

And to rebuild Britain.

That doesn’t mean these choices are easy.

But they are responsible.

[redacted political content]

This is a moment of fundamental choice for Britain.

I have made my choices.

The responsible choices.

To restore stability to our country.

To protect working people.

More teachers in our schools.

More appointments in our NHS.

More homes being built.

Fixing the foundations of our economy.

Investing in our future.

Delivering change.

Rebuilding Britain.

We on these benches commend those choices…

… and I commend this Statement to the House.

Updates to this page

Published 30 October 2024

MIL OSI United Kingdom –

January 25, 2025
MIL-OSI USA: Florida Company Pleads Guilty to Conspiring to Sell Misbranded N95 Masks to Hospital in Early Months of COVID-19 Pandemic

Source: US Department of Health and Human Services – 3

Department of Justice
U.S. Attorney’s Office
District of Massachusetts

FOR IMMEDIATE RELEASE
Wednesday, October 30, 2024

Two individuals also pleaded guilty to misbranding N95 masks and conspiracy to commit price gouging

BOSTON – A Florida company, and two individuals associated with the company, have pleaded guilty to charges associated with shipping facemasks that were misbranded as N95 respirators, and price gouging hospitals, during the earliest phase of the COVID-19 pandemic.

JDM Supply LLC (JDM) pleaded guilty to one count of conspiracy to introduce misbranded devices into interstate commerce with intent to defraud or mislead, in violation of the Federal Food, Drug and Cosmetic Act. Daniel Motha, 40, of Miami, Fla., and Jeffrey Motha, 36, of Norfolk, Mass., also pleaded guilty to one count of introduction of misbranded devices into interstate commerce and one count of conspiracy to commit price gouging in violation of the Defense Production Act. U.S. District Court Judge Myong J. Joun scheduled sentencing for Daniel Motha and Jeffrey Motha on March 4, 2025 and JDM on March 25, 2025. In August 2023, a third individual, Jason Colantuoni of Norfolk, Mass, pleaded guilty to conspiracy to commit price gouging in connection with this investigation.

In the spring of 2020, during the earliest phase of the COVID-19 pandemic, JDM and a company identified as “Company 1” conspired to ship facemasks that were misbranded as National Institute of Occupational Safety and Health (NIOSH)-approved, N95 respirators. One hospital accepted and paid for hundreds of thousands of purported N95 masks that were manufactured by Company 1 and sold by JDM. Ultimately, the hospital did not use the masks, which were eventually returned to Company 1. JDM misled the hospital into believing that the Company 1 masks were NIOSH-approved N95s, when in fact they were not.

In August 2020, a NIOSH lab tested a sample of the Company 1 masks that had been shipped to the hospital. The masks tested between 83.94% and 93.24% filtration efficiency, thus falling below the 95% minimum level of filtration efficiency required for N95 respirators.

Daniel Motha and Jeff Motha conspired to use JDM to exploit and profit off of the critical need of hospitals and healthcare workers for scarce N95 masks during the COVID-19 pandemic. They accumulated N95 masks from various sources and then sold the N95 masks through JDM to hospitals in Massachusetts, and elsewhere, at prices in excess of the prevailing market price.

The charge of conspiracy to introduce or deliver for introduction into interstate commerce a misbranded device with intent to defraud or mislead, brought against JDM, provides for a fine of $500,000 or twice the pecuniary gain or loss of the offense, whichever is greater and up to five years of probation. The charge of introduction or delivery for introduction into interstate commerce a misbranded device provides for a sentence of up to one year in prison; up to one year of supervised release; and a fine of $100,000. The charge of conspiracy to commit price gouging in violation of the Defense Production Act provides for a sentence of up to one year in prison; up to one year of supervised release; and a fine of up to $10,000. Sentences are imposed by a federal judge based upon the U.S. Sentencing Guidelines and statutes which govern the determination of a sentence in a criminal case.

Acting United States Attorney Joshua S. Levy; Ketty Larco-Ward, Inspector in Charge of the U.S. Postal Inspection Service, Boston Division; Fernando McMillan, Special Agent in Charge of the Food and Drug Administration, Office of Criminal Investigations; Christopher Algieri, Special Agent in Charge of the U.S. Department of Veterans Affairs Office of Inspector General, Northeast Field Office; Jodi Cohen, Special Agent in Charge of the Federal Bureau of Investigation, Boston Division; and Michael J. Krol, Acting Special Agent in Charge of Homeland Security Investigations in New England made the announcement today. Assistant U.S. Attorneys Bill Brady and Howard Locker of the Health Care Fraud Unit are prosecuting the case.

On May 17, 2021, the Attorney General established the COVID-19 Fraud Enforcement Task Force to marshal the resources of the Department of Justice in partnership with agencies across government to enhance efforts to combat and prevent pandemic-related fraud. The Task Force bolsters efforts to investigate and prosecute the most culpable domestic and international criminal actors and assists agencies tasked with administering relief programs to prevent fraud by augmenting and incorporating existing coordination mechanisms, identifying resources and techniques to uncover fraudulent actors and their schemes, and sharing and harnessing information and insights gained from prior enforcement efforts. For more information on the department’s response to the pandemic, please visit https://www.justice.gov/coronavirus and https://www.justice.gov/coronavirus/combatingfraud.

Anyone with information about allegations of attempted fraud involving COVID-19 can report it by calling the Department of Justice’s National Center for Disaster Fraud Hotline via the NCDF Web Complaint Form.

MIL OSI USA News –

January 25, 2025
MIL-OSI New Zealand: Dire benefit forecasts show the need for Welfare that Works
Source: New Zealand Government

A new report that forecasts young people on benefits will spend an average of 20 more years relying on welfare underscores the need for the Government’s reforms, Social Development and Employment Minister Louise Upston says.

MSD’s latest Benefit System Insights report, released today, which estimates how many future years different groups of beneficiaries will spend on a main benefit over their lifetimes, found little improvement in these projections between 2022 and 2023 after several years of sustained increases.

The report found the following:
- It estimated that people under the age of 25 on a main benefit would spend an average of about 20 more years on a benefit over their lifetimes – 39 per cent longer than the estimate was under the National Government in 2017.
- People under the age of 25 on Jobseeker Support would spend an average of about 18 more years on a benefit over their lifetimes – 49 per cent longer than in 2017.
- Those under the age of 20 who were receiving a youth benefit would spend an average of about 23 more years on a benefit over their lifetimes – 51 per cent longer than in 2017.
- Jobseeker Support beneficiaries of all ages who were ‘work-ready’ would spend an average of about 13 more years on a benefit over their lifetimes – 40 per cent longer than in 2017.
“These findings show how much of a problem welfare dependency has become in recent years and highlight the urgent need for the Government’s Welfare that Works reforms to get more people into jobs,” Louise Upston says.

“The trend of people spending longer on benefits set in well before the Covid pandemic and was baked in by the time the previous government left office.

“Our benefit system should be a safety net, not a dragnet that keeps people down. It must be a genuine pathway to employment for those who can work.

“This Government has greater aspirations for tens of thousands of young New Zealanders than spending roughly half their working-age lives on welfare.

“That is why we have returned clear consequences for job seekers who don’t fulfil their benefit obligations to prepare for or find work. It’s crucial that young people are taking basic steps to avoid the trap of long-term benefit dependency.

“We have also introduced more early intervention for young beneficiaries through a new phone-based employment case management service, 2100 more places for young people to get community job coaching, more regular work seminars, and a traffic light system to help them stay on track with their obligations.

“The work ahead to address the deep-rooted causes of welfare dependency is considerable, but so is this Government’s commitment to support New Zealanders’ aspirations for a better life through work.”

MIL OSI New Zealand News –
January 25, 2025
MIL-OSI: Banco Santander-Chile Announces Third Quarter 2024 Earnings

Source: GlobeNewswire (MIL-OSI)

SANTIAGO, Chile, Oct. 30, 2024 (GLOBE NEWSWIRE) — Banco Santander Chile (NYSE: BSAC; SSE: Bsantander) announced today its results¹ for the nine-month period ended September 30, 2024, and third quarter 2024 (3Q24).

ROAE²of 23.1% in 3Q24³and 18.2% in 9M24⁴.

In the third quarter of 2024 (3Q24), the Bank’s net income attributable to shareholders totaled $243,133 million ($1.29 per share and US$ 0.58 per ADR), reflecting an increase of 11.7% compared to the previous quarter (2Q24), with an ROAE of 23.1%.

As of September 30, 2024, the Bank’s net income attributable to shareholders totaled $581.109 billion ($3.08 per share and US$1.37 per ADR), reflecting an increase of 81.9% compared to the same period of the previous year and with an ROAE of 18.2%.

The increase in results in the quarter is explained by an increase in the Bank’s main income lines, with operating income increasing by 6.3% in the quarter, driven by a better interest margin and readjustments.

Strong recovery of NIM⁵to 3.9% in 3Q24 and 3.4% in 9M24.

Net interest and readjustment income (NII) accumulated as of September 30, 2024 increased by 74.8% compared to the same period in 2023. This increase in NII was due to higher interest income due to improvements in the cost of funds resulting from a lower monetary policy rate, partially offset by lower readjustment income due to lower inflation in the period.

In 3Q24, total net interest and readjustment income increased by 4.2% compared to 2Q24. This is explained by higher net interest income due to lower funding costs and better investment portfolio performance, offset by lower net readjustment income due to lower UF variation in the quarter.

Net fees increase 8.3% in the quarter, reaching recurrence⁶levels of 63.4%.

Net fees increased 8.3% QoQ due to increased customer numbers and greater use of products such as mutual funds, cards and current accounts. With this, the recurrence ratio (total net fees divided by total core expenses) is 63.4% in 3Q24, demonstrating that more than half of the Bank’s expenses are financed by fees generated by our customers.

In the nine months to September 30, 2024, fees increased by 5.4% compared to the same period in 2023, mainly due to higher fees from current accounts, mutual fund brokerage and Getnet. This was partially offset by the impact of interchange fee regulation.

Getnet’s customer base continues to grow and its expansion continues

As a result of our strategy to strengthen digital products, the Bank’s market share in current accounts remains strong. According to the latest publicly available information, which is as of July 2024, our market share reaches 23.8% in current accounts, which includes products such as Santander Life and PYME Life, while our US$ current account solution is already attracting 41.2% of customers in this market. In total, our digital customers total around 2.2 million and represent 86% of our active customers, with the products with the greatest traction being deposits, credit cards, investment funds and general insurance brokerage.

Getnet’s entry into the Chilean acquiring market continues to surprise with good results, with net commissions of $54 billion in 9M24 (not including operating expenses). Customer reception has been high, with more than 182 thousand affiliated merchants and more than 243 thousand operational POSs, with a strong demand from SME clients and an expansion towards larger clients that require a Host to Host solution, offering an integrated payment system for more sophisticated clients. Thanks to Getnet and other initiatives such as the Cuenta Pyme Life, we are seeing significant growth in current accounts for SMEs and companies, growing 26.7% YoY by July 2024, and with a market share of 39.3% according to the CMF.

For the fifth consecutive year we are Top 1 in NPS among our Chilean peers

As a result of all our efforts, our customers are the most satisfied with us. As of September 2024, our NPS is 59 points, top 1 among our peers. We also rank first in net satisfaction in the evaluation of our account executives and contact center with 66 and 72 points respectively. Regarding digital channels, they also continue to be a strength, with the website standing out with a net satisfaction of 72 and the App with 74 points.

Efficiency ratio of 36.3% in the quarter as income improves and costs remain under control

The Bank’s efficiency ratio reached 40.0% as of September 30, 2024, better than the 48.0% of the same period last year, with a quarterly efficiency ratio of 36.3%, explained by the recovery of revenues in the quarter and solid cost control.

Core support expenses (salaries, administration and amortization) grew 4.4% in 9M24 compared to 9M23 and 0.4% compared to 2Q24, in line with the growth of inflation, as we mentioned in our previous guidance. Total operating expenses (which includes other expenses) increased 13.1% in 9M24 compared to the same period in 2023 driven by higher other operating expenses, related to a provision for the restructuring of our branch network and the transformation to Work/Café and also the progress in Digital Banking.

Cost of credit of 1.28% in 9M24, in line with the evolution of asset quality given the economic scenario.

During the Covid-19 pandemic, asset quality benefited from state aid and pension fund withdrawals, which led to a positive performance in assets during that period, before normalizing in line with the performance of the economy and the drainage of excess liquidity from households. Currently, our clients’ performance is reflecting the state of the economy and the labor market, where delinquency is higher than the levels we saw before the pandemic with the non-performing loans (NPL) ratio increasing to 3.1% and the impaired portfolio to 6.7% at September 2024. Overall the cost of credit remained stable at 1.28% in the quarter.

Solid capital levels with a BIS⁷ratio of 17.2% and a CET1⁸of 10.7%.

Our total BIS ratio reached 17.2% as of September 30, 2024 and the CET1 ratio remains solid at 10.7%, even considering that we increased the dividend provision for the 2024 income from 30% to 60% in June 2024 and then to 70% in September 2024. Risk-weighted assets (RWA) increased 0.8% since December 31, 2023 and 0.3% QoQ, explained by a growth in market risk-weighted assets offset by a decrease in credit risk-weighted assets. Additionally, in January 2024, the CMF announced the Pillar II charges for six banks in the Chilean system, and we highlight that, on this occasion, they did not assign a charge to the Bank.

Upgrading guidance for 2024 and soft guidance for 2025

Given the strong recovery in our results and our current economic estimates for the fourth quarter, we are improving our ROAE guidance for 2024 to 18%-19%. We have upgraded our medium term guidance for ROAEs to 18%-20% and our soft guidance for 2025 indicates a ROAE within this range.

Banco Santander Chile is one of the companies with the highest risk classifications in Latin America with an A2 rating from Moody’s, A- from Standard and Poor’s, A+ from Japan Credit Rating Agency, AA- from HR Ratings and A from KBRA. All our ratings as of the date of this report have a Stable Outlook.

As of September 30, 2024, the Bank has total assets of $65,890,254 million (US$73,419 million), total gross loans (including loans to banks) at amortized cost of $40,362,740 million (US$44,975 million), total deposits of $29,617,085 million (US$33,001 million) and shareholders’ equity of $4,218,883 million (US$4,701 million). The BIS capital ratio was 17.2%, with a core capital ratio of 10.7%. As of September 30, 2024, Santander Chile employed 8,861 people and has 234 branches throughout Chile.

CONTACT INFORMATION
Cristian Vicuña
Chief Strategy Officer and Head of Investor Relations
Banco Santander Chile
Bandera 140, Floor 20
Santiago, Chile
Email: irelations@santander.cl Website: www.santander.cl

^¹ The information contained in this report is presented in accordance with Chilean Bank GAAP as defined by the Financial Markets Commission (FMC).
^² Annualized net income attributable to shareholders of the Bank divided by the average equity attributable to equity holders
^³ The third quarter of 2024
^⁴ The nine months accumulated as of September 30, 2024
^⁵ NIM: Net interest margin. Annualized net interest income and annualized readjustments divided by interest-earning assets
^⁶Recurrence: Net commissions divided by structural operating expenses (excludes other operating expenses).
^⁷ Regulatory capital divided by risk-weighted assets, according to CMF BIS III definitions
^⁸ Core capital divided by risk-weighted assets, according to CMF BIS III definitions.

The MIL Network –

January 25, 2025
MIL-OSI: ServiceTrade 2024 Benchmark Reports Reveal Fire Protection and Mechanical Service Customers Outperform Industry Peers

Source: GlobeNewswire (MIL-OSI)

DURHAM, N.C., Oct. 30, 2024 (GLOBE NEWSWIRE) — ServiceTrade, Inc., a leading software platform for commercial mechanical and fire system service contractors, is pleased to announce the release of its 2024 ServiceTrade Benchmark Reports. The annual reports provide commercial fire and mechanical contractors with critical insights to evaluate their business performance against peers, enabling them to identify optimization opportunities and strengthen their businesses.

The 2024 ServiceTrade Benchmark Reports offer a data-driven analysis of the operational performance of US and Canada-based commercial fire and mechanical contractor businesses. Specifically, the reports reveal contractors’ performance in year-over-year revenue, driven by smart strategies such as uncovering proactive pull-through revenue opportunities from existing customers, prioritizing high-value work, and optimizing back-end processes. The reports also provide insights and proven best practices to help contractors take advantage of operational trends and identify sustainable growth, revenue performance, and efficiency opportunities.

ServiceTrade Customers Outperform Industry Average

Per the reports, ServiceTrade customers consistently outperform industry averages. The reports measure two key industry sectors: fire protection and commercial mechanical HVAC service.

The median YoY growth rate for mechanical contractors using the ServiceTrade platform was 12.3%, while top performers (those in the 75th percentile) grew at 30.1%. This far outpaces the industry average CAGR for heating and air conditioning contractors’ revenue in the US market, which has shown minimal overall growth of less than 1% over the last five years. Looking forward, the US HVAC services market is expected to witness a CAGR of 3.4% during 2024-2030.

In the fire industry, the median YoY growth rate for ServiceTrade customers was 14.9%, while top performers grew at 33.2%. This far outpaces the industry average performance. Fire Protection contractors’ revenue has contracted at a rate of 1.6% over the last 5 years, despite a post-Covid jump of 1.2% in 2023.

“As the leading provider of field service management software for commercial contractors, we’re proud to provide the industry with these comprehensive benchmarks,” said Shawn Mims, VP of Marketing at ServiceTrade. “The ServiceTrade annual benchmark reports are known for critical data and market insights that help companies focus on the right strategies, tactics and opportunities to improve their business performance.”

The full ServiceTrade Benchmark Reports are available for free download:

To learn more about ServiceTrade:

About ServiceTrade:
ServiceTrade, Inc. is a software platform for commercial mechanical, fire, and life safety contractors. During a chronic skilled labor shortage, ServiceTrade helps commercial contractors increase profit by improving service and project operations, increasing technician productivity, selling more service agreements, and growing customer loyalty. Located in Durham, North Carolina, ServiceTrade was founded in 2012 to automate and streamline the commercial mechanical and fire protection industry and has grown to have more than 1,300 customers. More than 10% of the commercial or industrial buildings in the United States are serviced by contractors using ServiceTrade. Learn more at www.servicetrade.com.

Sources:

Heating & Air-Conditioning Contractors in the US – Market Size, Industry Analysis, Trends and Forecasts (2024-2029), IBIS World, July 2024

US HVAC Services Market Size and Share Analysis – Trends, Drivers, Competitive Landscape, and Forecasts (2024-2030) PS Market Research

U.S. Fire Protection System Market Size, Share & Trends Analysis Report By Product (Detection, Suppression, Response, Analysis, Sprinkler System), By Service, By Application, And Segment Forecasts, 2024 – 2030, Grandview Research, February 2024

Fire Protection and Security System Installation Contractors in the US – Market Size, Industry Analysis, Trends and Forecasts (2024-2029), IBIS World, January 2024

Contact:
Media@KTCMarketingandPR.com

The MIL Network –

January 25, 2025
MIL-OSI: Exciting Opportunity to Leverage Triller’s Underutilized Assets to Create Next-Gen Entertainment Platform
Source: GlobeNewswire (MIL-OSI)

NEW YORK, NY, Oct. 30, 2024 (GLOBE NEWSWIRE) — Triller Group Inc. (Nasdaq: ILLR) (“Triller Group” or “the Company”) today announced the release of its latest Fact Sheet, providing initial insights into the Company’s mission to become the next generation Entertainment Platform.

“I could not be more excited about our future prospects, as an App, as a brand and as a group of leading-edge companies”, said Bob Diamond, Chairman of the Board. “We have the disruptive fighting brand in BKFC, the next generation streaming platform in TrillerTV, sophisticated AI tools helping Presidential candidates and NFL franchises find their audiences, and an App upon which we will build an integrated vertical video and connected TV multimedia entertainment platform.”

With the creator economy valued at a massive $180 billion and experiencing robust growth, Triller Group is well positioned to address emerging issues driven by ongoing technological disruption. Issues such as creators or professional content providers struggling to protect, leverage, or monetize their content. Or users looking for better ways to discover and engage with exciting new content. These unmet needs of creators, brands and users create huge market opportunities for Triller Group.

As the Company develops and implements strategies to meet these needs, Triller Group is not starting from scratch. The Company already has a strong foundation with powerful assets and brands in vertical video (Triller App), connected TV (TrillerTV) and content and events (BKFC) that foster passionate user engagement through authenticity and trust. The transformation journey has already started as evidenced by the fact that the Company has:
- A content-rich Triller App, with 36% of users actively creating content.
- A highly sophisticated, AI-driven suite of tools and services, currently serving top creators and leading brands globally on the Triller App and across the social media landscape.
- More than 3,000 events live-streamed annually without a glitch through TrillerTV.
- Proof of concept with BKFC, the world’s fastest-growing combat league, featuring highly successful events and unique content made accessible across all media distribution channels, including vertical video and connected TV, on a global scale.
As Triller Group connects and integrates these underleveraged assets, Triller Group will start to occupy a truly unique position as an entertainment platform, translating into unparalleled value for all our stakeholders.

Over the next few weeks, the Company will provide further updates as an experienced management team renowned for its execution and integrity is being put into place under the leadership of Kevin McGurn, the Company’s previously announced incoming CEO. More details on the transformation plan and associated business plan will also be provided during a planned investor and media day in November 2024.

Triller Group is excited to embark on this journey to redefine entertainment and create unparalleled opportunities for creators, brands and audiences alike.

The Fact Sheet is available on the Company’s Investor Relations page at the following address: https://trillercorp.com/ir/.

About Triller Group Inc.

Triller Group is a US-based company that operates two main businesses: the newly merged US-based social media operations (Triller Corp.), and the legacy operations of the Company in Hong Kong (“AGBA”).

Triller Corp. is a next generation, AI-powered, social media and live-streaming event platform for creators. Pairing music culture with sports, fashion, entertainment, and influencers through a 360-degree view of content and technology, Triller Corp. uses proprietary AI technology to push and track content virally to affiliated and non-affiliated sites and networks, enabling them to reach millions of additional users. Triller Corp. additionally owns Triller Sports, Bare-Knuckle Fighting Championship (BKFC); Amplify.ai, a leading machine-learning, AI platform; and TrillerTV, a premier global PPV, AVOD, and SVOD streaming service. For more information, visit www.triller.co.

Established in 1993, AGBA is a leading, multi-channel business platform that incorporates cutting edge machine-learning and offers a broad set of financial services and healthcare products to consumers through a tech-led ecosystem, enabling clients to unlock the choices that best suit their needs. Trusted by over 400,000 individual and corporate customers, the Group is organized into four market-leading businesses: Platform Business, Distribution Business, Healthcare Business, and Fintech Business. For more information, please visit www.agba.com.

Safe Harbor Statement

This press release contains forward-looking statements as defined by the Private Securities Litigation Reform Act of 1995. Forward-looking statements include statements concerning plans, objectives, goals, strategies, future events or performance, and underlying assumptions and other statements that are other than statements of historical facts. When the Company uses words such as “may,” “will,” “intend,” “should,” “believe,” “expect,” “anticipate,” “project,” “estimate” or similar expressions that do not relate solely to historical matters, it is making forward-looking statements. Forward-looking statements are not guarantees of future performance and involve risks and uncertainties that may cause the actual results to differ materially from the Company’s expectations discussed in the forward-looking statements. These statements are subject to uncertainties and risks including, but not limited to, the following: the Company’s goals and strategies; the Company’s future business development; product and service demand and acceptance; changes in technology; economic conditions; the outcome of any legal proceedings that may be instituted against us following the consummation of the business combination; expectations regarding our strategies and future financial performance, including its future business plans or objectives, prospective performance and opportunities and competitors, revenues, products, pricing, operating expenses, market trends, liquidity, cash flows and uses of cash, capital expenditures, and our ability to invest in growth initiatives and pursue acquisition opportunities; reputation and brand; the impact of competition and pricing; government regulations; fluctuations in general economic and business conditions in Hong Kong and the international markets the Company plans to serve and assumptions underlying or related to any of the foregoing and other risks contained in reports filed by the Company with the SEC, the length and severity of the recent coronavirus outbreak, including its impacts across our business and operations. For these reasons, among others, investors are cautioned not to place undue reliance upon any forward-looking statements in this press release. Additional factors are discussed in the Company’s filings with the SEC, which are available for review at www.sec.gov. The Company undertakes no obligation to publicly revise these forward–looking statements to reflect events or circumstances that arise after the date hereof.

Investor & Media Relations:

Bethany Lai
ir@triller.co
investorrelations@triller.co

Anthony Silverman
ads@apellaadvisors.com

# # #

The MIL Network –
January 25, 2025
MIL-OSI Security: Florida Company Pleads Guilty to Conspiring to Sell Misbranded N95 Masks to Hospital in Early Months of COVID-19 Pandemic

Source: Office of United States Attorneys

Two individuals also pleaded guilty to misbranding N95 masks and conspiracy to commit price gouging

BOSTON – A Florida company, and two individuals associated with the company, have pleaded guilty to charges associated with shipping facemasks that were misbranded as N95 respirators, and price gouging hospitals, during the earliest phase of the COVID-19 pandemic.

JDM Supply LLC (JDM) pleaded guilty to one count of conspiracy to introduce misbranded devices into interstate commerce with intent to defraud or mislead, in violation of the Federal Food, Drug and Cosmetic Act. Daniel Motha, 40, of Miami, Fla., and Jeffrey Motha, 36, of Norfolk, Mass., also pleaded guilty to one count of introduction of misbranded devices into interstate commerce and one count of conspiracy to commit price gouging in violation of the Defense Production Act. U.S. District Court Judge Myong J. Joun scheduled sentencing for Daniel Motha and Jeffrey Motha on March 4, 2025 and JDM on March 25, 2025. In August 2023, a third individual, Jason Colantuoni of Norfolk, Mass, pleaded guilty to conspiracy to commit price gouging in connection with this investigation.

In the spring of 2020, during the earliest phase of the COVID-19 pandemic, JDM and a company identified as “Company 1” conspired to ship facemasks that were misbranded as National Institute of Occupational Safety and Health (NIOSH)-approved, N95 respirators. One hospital accepted and paid for hundreds of thousands of purported N95 masks that were manufactured by Company 1 and sold by JDM. Ultimately, the hospital did not use the masks, which were eventually returned to Company 1. JDM misled the hospital into believing that the Company 1 masks were NIOSH-approved N95s, when in fact they were not.

In August 2020, a NIOSH lab tested a sample of the Company 1 masks that had been shipped to the hospital. The masks tested between 83.94% and 93.24% filtration efficiency, thus falling below the 95% minimum level of filtration efficiency required for N95 respirators.

Daniel Motha and Jeff Motha conspired to use JDM to exploit and profit off of the critical need of hospitals and healthcare workers for scarce N95 masks during the COVID-19 pandemic. They accumulated N95 masks from various sources and then sold the N95 masks through JDM to hospitals in Massachusetts, and elsewhere, at prices in excess of the prevailing market price.

The charge of conspiracy to introduce or deliver for introduction into interstate commerce a misbranded device with intent to defraud or mislead, brought against JDM, provides for a fine of $500,000 or twice the pecuniary gain or loss of the offense, whichever is greater and up to five years of probation. The charge of introduction or delivery for introduction into interstate commerce a misbranded device provides for a sentence of up to one year in prison; up to one year of supervised release; and a fine of $100,000. The charge of conspiracy to commit price gouging in violation of the Defense Production Act provides for a sentence of up to one year in prison; up to one year of supervised release; and a fine of up to $10,000. Sentences are imposed by a federal judge based upon the U.S. Sentencing Guidelines and statutes which govern the determination of a sentence in a criminal case.

Acting United States Attorney Joshua S. Levy; Ketty Larco-Ward, Inspector in Charge of the U.S. Postal Inspection Service, Boston Division; Fernando McMillan, Special Agent in Charge of the Food and Drug Administration, Office of Criminal Investigations; Christopher Algieri, Special Agent in Charge of the U.S. Department of Veterans Affairs Office of Inspector General, Northeast Field Office; Jodi Cohen, Special Agent in Charge of the Federal Bureau of Investigation, Boston Division; and Michael J. Krol, Acting Special Agent in Charge of Homeland Security Investigations in New England made the announcement today. Assistant U.S. Attorneys Bill Brady and Howard Locker of the Health Care Fraud Unit are prosecuting the case.

On May 17, 2021, the Attorney General established the COVID-19 Fraud Enforcement Task Force to marshal the resources of the Department of Justice in partnership with agencies across government to enhance efforts to combat and prevent pandemic-related fraud. The Task Force bolsters efforts to investigate and prosecute the most culpable domestic and international criminal actors and assists agencies tasked with administering relief programs to prevent fraud by augmenting and incorporating existing coordination mechanisms, identifying resources and techniques to uncover fraudulent actors and their schemes, and sharing and harnessing information and insights gained from prior enforcement efforts. For more information on the department’s response to the pandemic, please visit https://www.justice.gov/coronavirus and https://www.justice.gov/coronavirus/combatingfraud.

Anyone with information about allegations of attempted fraud involving COVID-19 can report it by calling the Department of Justice’s National Center for Disaster Fraud Hotline via the NCDF Web Complaint Form.

MIL Security OSI –

January 25, 2025
MIL-OSI United Kingdom: Mind the gap… in public toilets on the tube

Source: Mayor of London

[1] Transport for London quarterly performance report

Caroline has been pushing for toilet funding in every Mayoral budget since the 2020-2021 cycle. During the coronavirus pandemic in 2020, Caroline pointed out the serious public health consequences of the lack of public toilets across London.

The following summer, Caroline incorporated her work with the charity Muscular Dystrophy to again implore the Mayor to see how essential toilets are to accessibility on Lonon’s transport network.

In the 2022 budget cycle, Caroline’s Green Group budget amendment tried to once more fund public toilets, this time by proposing a £10 million investment for a brand-new London toilets fund to give local councils access to money to refurbish, reopen and revitalise these essential local amenities.

The following year, Caroline’s fully costed and feasible 2023 budget amendment for new TfL toilets was mysteriously blocked by the Assembly Labour group in a shocking blow to older and disabled Londoners, new parents, and so many more travellers in need of a loo on their journeys. Seeming to understand the gravity of his party’s mistake, the TfL toilet feasibility study was first proposed by London’s Mayor following his party’s puzzling opposition to that blocked Toilet amendment.

The Mayor’s team indicated the feasibility study would be shared by June 2023, but by August that deadline had been pushed back as well.

Later that month, Caroline published the ‘Loo League Table,’ analysing the many loo ‘deserts’ across the transport network and pushing TfL to explain its failure to make use of the existing upgrade programme on the tube to provide new toilet facilities. This report followed her 2021 “Toilet Paper” report as Chair of the London Assembly Health Committee, in which the committee found 91.3 per cent of respondents to their survey do not feel toilet provision is adequate to meet their needs.

In January 2024, Caroline welcomed the Mayor’s allocation of £3 million for public toilets on the TfL network in the Mayor’s budget, though urged the Mayor to commit to the full £20 million investment needed to ensure every tube stop has a safe, clean, and operable public toilet.

Building on that momentum, in February 2024 Caroline commissioned new polling from YouGov showing that 74 per cent of respondents believe that there should be more toilets on the TfL network.

Most recently, in March 2024 Caroline pressed the Mayor directly over the latest delay in his long-promised feasibility study, where the Mayor explained that while “good progress has been made” on the feasibility study, TfL now plans to “publish the full study in the summer.”

Though several weeks after summer’s end now, Caroline proudly joined the Mayor, Deputy Mayor for Transport Seb Dance, and TfL Customer Director Emma Strain at White Hart Lane station today to welcome in an era of what will, hopefully, culminate with toilets built across the TfL network.

MIL OSI United Kingdom –

January 25, 2025
MIL-OSI New Zealand: South Sudan
Source: New Zealand Ministry of Foreign Affairs and Trade – Safe Travel
- Reviewed: 30 October 2024, 14:28 NZDT
- Still current at: 30 October 2024
Related news features

If you are planning international travel at this time, please read our COVID-19 related travel advice here, alongside our destination specific travel advice below.

Do not travel to South Sudan due to ongoing armed conflict, inter-ethnic violence and violent crime (level 4 of 4).

New Zealanders currently in South Sudan are advised to depart as soon as it is safe to do so.

South Sudan

Armed Conflict/Civil Unrest
Pockets of armed conflict between government and various opposition forces remain and the security situation in Juba has the potential to deteriorate with little or no warning. Land routes into and out of South Sudan may be blocked and flights may be cancelled at short notice. The political and security situation throughout South Sudan remains volatile.

Inter-ethnic violence and cattle raiding continues to occur throughout the country, with significant loss of life. There is a complete absence of rule of law outside of the capital Juba and even in Juba, the capacity of the authorities to uphold law and order is very limited.

Areas within 40 kilometres of South Sudan’s northern border with Sudan are also particularly dangerous and vulnerable to armed incursions and violence. Parts of the border remain disputed and military forces are deployed in these areas.

The border areas with South Sudan’s other neighbouring countries, including Ethiopia, the Democratic Republic of the Congo, Kenya, the Central African Republic, and Uganda are extremely dangerous due to armed conflict, military activity and other violence. There are regular reports of attacks by armed groups on vehicles travelling on the main road connecting Juba to Uganda (Jiba-Niomule road).

We recommend you avoid all protests, demonstrations and large public gatherings in South Sudan as they have the potential to turn violent with little warning. Monitor local and international media, review personal security plans and be aware of your surroundings.

Violent Crime
Violent crime, including kidnapping, murder, armed robbery, home invasions, car-jacking, and sexual assault is a significant problem throughout South Sudan, both in urban and rural areas. The economic situation has led to a significant increase in both petty and violent crime. Criminals are often armed as weapons are readily accessible.

The government has limited capacity to deter crime and maintain law and order throughout South Sudan. Banditry and lawlessness is an issue in rural areas. Humanitarian workers have been the targets of killings and violence in the past.

New Zealanders in South Sudan should exercise a very high degree of personal security awareness at all times. No resistance should be given if you are the victim of an armed robbery or carjacking as this could lead to an escalation in violence. For security reasons we recommend against travelling alone, at night, or to isolated areas.

Petty crime, such as bag snatching and pickpocketing, also occurs and is often accompanied by violence. We advise New Zealanders to be alert to their surroundings at all times and take steps to safeguard and secure their personal belongings.

Road Travel
We strongly advise against using public transport due to safety concerns.

If travelling by road, car doors should be locked and windows up.

Official checkpoints are frequently set up by security forces and have been known to become hostile or violent. Individuals staffing checkpoints have been known to solicit bribes. Criminals who pose as police officers have also set up roadblocks. At checkpoints, remain in your vehicle and produce requested documents through a raised window. We recommend carrying colour photocopies of your passport and identity documents and producing these when requested, not the originals.

Landmines
There is a risk from landmines, which are reportedly present throughout South Sudan, including in Juba. We advise you not to stray off well-used public roads and paths.

General Travel Advice
As there is no New Zealand diplomatic presence in South Sudan, the ability of the government to assist New Zealand citizens is severely limited. We offer advice to New Zealanders about contingency planning that travellers to South Sudan should consider.

We advise New Zealanders in South Sudan to be vigilant and take appropriate precautions to ensure their safety, including by seeking professional security advice. You should have a contingency plan in place for departure, monitor developments closely through the media and other local information sources. As a precautionary measure, we recommend ensuring adequate supplies of food, water, fuel, cash and essential medications are always on hand and travel documents are kept up to date.

New Zealanders travelling or living in South Sudan should have a comprehensive travel insurance policy in place that includes provision for medical evacuation by air. You should check that your travel insurance policy covers travel to South Sudan – exclusions may well apply. Only very limited medical facilities are available in South Sudan.

The rainy season typically runs from April to November, during which flooding often occurs. Flooding impacts transport and communications infrastructure, as well as lead to shortages of drinking water and food. Severe flooding has led to displacement, property damage and loss of life.

Penalties for possession, use or trafficking of illegal drugs are severe and can include the death penalty.

New Zealanders are advised to respect religious, social and cultural traditions in South Sudan to avoid offending local sensitivities. Modesty and discretion is recommended for both dress and behaviour.

Photography, including from a mobile phone, without a permit from the Ministry of Information in South Sudan is illegal. Taking photographs without a permit will immediately attract suspicion, and could lead to detention. Even with a permit, it is illegal to take photos of airfields, military installations or personal, government buildings and infrastructure.

New Zealanders who decide to live or travel in South Sudan against our advice are strongly encouraged to register their details with the Ministry of Foreign Affairs and Trade.

Travel tips

See our regional advice for Africa

Top of page

MIL OSI New Zealand News –
January 25, 2025
MIL-OSI New Zealand: Guatemala
Source: New Zealand Ministry of Foreign Affairs and Trade – Safe Travel
- Reviewed: 30 October 2024, 15:01 NZDT
- Still current at: 30 October 2024
Related news features

If you are planning international travel at this time, please read our COVID-19 related travel advice here, alongside our destination specific travel advice below.

Avoid non-essential travel to the following areas due to violent crime (level 3 of 4):
- within 5km of the Mexican border from the Pacific Coast up to and including the Gracias a Dios crossing
- to the towns of Santa Ana Huista, San Antonio Huista and La Democracia in the department of Huehuetenangodue.
Exercise increased caution elsewhere in Guatemala due to violent crime and civil unrest (level 2 of 4).

Guatemala

Violent Crime
Guatemala has a high violent crime rate. Criminal acts often involve firearms and may include armed robbery, kidnapping, sexual assault and murder. The majority of this crime is drug and gang-related, however, violence can be indiscriminate and occur in areas frequented by tourists.

New Zealanders in Guatemala should remain security conscious and exercise a high degree of caution at all times. This includes in Guatemala City and other major cities, public areas and tourist destinations including Tikal, Petén, Antigua, Volcán de Pacaya and Lake Atitlán.

Sexual assault remains a risk. There have been incidents of drink spiking in tourist areas such as Antigua. We advise New Zealanders to exercise a high degree of caution and avoid travelling alone, especially at night.

Pickpockets and bag snatchers are prevalent in major cities and tourist sites, especially in central markets. We advise New Zealanders to take steps to safeguard and secure their personal belongings.

“Express kidnappings” have also been reported in Guatemala, where criminals abduct a victim for a short amount of time and force them to withdraw funds from their bank account. To reduce the risk of this occurring we recommend you use ATMs that are located within bank branches and during daylight hours only. We also recommend you avoid displaying or wearing items that appear valuable, such as mobile devices and jewellery. No resistance should be given if you are the victim of crime as this could lead to an escalation in violence. Victims have been killed and injured attempting to resist perpetrators.

When travelling to remote areas, including to volcanoes, it may be safer to travel with others or a reputable tour company. The Guatemalan Government PROATUR service offers tourist advice and security escorts for travel around the country.

Road Travel
Inter-city travel can be dangerous, particularly after dark. There have been reports of armed robbery and bus/carjackings affecting tourists on a number of travel routes, including along main highways and the road to and from the international airport in Guatemala City. Armed criminals have been known to set up roadblocks and pose as police officers. If travelling by road, you should keep doors locked, valuables out of sight and windows up at all times. Wherever possible travel in a convoy and avoid all travel after dark.

Travel on local public buses (“chicken buses”) should be avoided for safety and security reasons as they are usually overloaded and there have been armed attacks by gangs and incidents of crime against foreigners on buses. Radio-dispatched or hotel taxis are the safest option as there have been robberies and assaults associated with unofficial taxis. Prepaid vouchers can also be purchased from the INGUAT (tourist office) in the arrivals terminal.

Borders
Special care should also be taken in border areas with Belize, Mexico, Honduras and El Salvador and at border crossings due to organised crime and drug-related violence. Allow enough time for border formalities so that you can arrive at your destination before dark.

Seismic Activity
Guatemala lies in a seismically active zone with four active volcanoes, and the possibility of an eruption always exists. Previously volcanic activity has forced evacuation of nearby visitors. Tremors are common, so familiarise yourself with earthquake safety measures. Travellers should be aware of the possibility for travel disruptions in the event of seismic or volcanic activity. Monitor levels of volcanic activity through the local media, and follow any alerts or instructions from local authorities.

Civil Unrest
Protests and demonstrations, including strike action and roadblocks, occur across Guatemala and have the potential to turn violent with little notice. They can cause disruptions to traffic and essential services. We recommend you avoid large gatherings, monitor the local media for updated security information and follow any instructions issued by local authorities, including curfews. Participation in demonstrations by foreigners is illegal and may result in detention and expulsion from the country.

General Travel Advice
Carry a photocopy or certified true copy of your passport as a form of personal identification when travelling.

Penalties for possession, use or trafficking of illegal drugs are severe and can include lengthy imprisonment or fines.

Do not take photographs of children without permission. Many people in Guatemala fear that children are being kidnapped for adoption or for theft of vital organs, and foreigners have been caught up in violent incidents related to accusations and fears of child kidnapping. Photography of government buildings, airports and military establishments is prohibited, and could result in detention. If in doubt, don’t take a picture.

Medical facilities are limited outside Guatemala City. New Zealanders in Guatemala should have a comprehensive travel insurance policy in place that includes provisions for adventure activities and medical evacuation by air.

New Zealanders in Guatemala are encouraged to register their details with the Ministry of Foreign Affairs and Trade.

Travel tips

The New Zealand Embassy Mexico City, Mexico is accredited to Guatemala

Street Address Jaime Balmes No 8, 4th Floor, Los Morales, Polanco, Mexico D.F. 11510 Telephone +52 55 5283 9460 Fax +52 55 5283 9480 Email nzmexico@mfat.govt.nz Web Site http://www.mfat.govt.nz/mexico Hours Mon – Fri 0930 – 1400

New Zealand Honorary Consulate Guatemala City, Guatemala

Street Address 13 Calle 7-71, Zona 10, Guatemala City 01010, Guatemala Telephone (+502) 2360-8276 Alternate Telephone (+502) 2360-4961 Fax +502 2431 3742 Email kiwiguatemala@gmail.com

See our regional advice for Central/South America

Top of page

MIL OSI New Zealand News –
January 25, 2025
MIL-OSI Russia: “I would be interested in talking to Chinese farmers”

Translation. Region: Russian Federation –

Source: State University Higher School of Economics – State University Higher School of Economics –

Veronika Smirnova studies the Chinese approach to global food security and spent a year at the Renmin University of China in Beijing. In an interview with the HSE Young Scientists project, she spoke about Xi Jinping’s flagship initiatives, her interest in FAO’s John Boyd Orr, and her love of malatan and xiao long bao.

How I got started in science

It wasn’t a strategic plan. Science chose me, like many future scientists who enjoyed studying many subjects at school. Surprisingly, math and physics were the easiest for me, but I ended up choosing the humanities.

Around the 9th grade, I thought about what direction I would like to choose in the future, and the topic of international relations seemed interesting to me. At that time, I was not yet interested in Chinese culture, I only heard in the news that Russian-Chinese relations were developing at a rapid pace. When it was time to choose a second language (internationalists always learn two), I spent a long time choosing between German and French. But then something sank in my heart, and I began to study Chinese, not yet knowing what awaited me in the future. This is how my love for China began, I gradually began to take an interest in culture and politics.

In my undergraduate studies at Nizhny Novgorod State University, we had amazing courses on analytics for government bodies. I really liked this subject, and I became interested in working in this field. When I went to the master’s program at HSE, I saw that CCEMI, where I now work, was recruiting interns, and I applied. That’s how my path in science began. Then I went to graduate school and continued scientific research.

What am I studying?

China’s participation in the global food security system. Interest in this topic did not develop immediately. In my bachelor’s degree, I studied more about culture and soft power. But in my master’s degree, I thought: I would like to study something more practice-oriented, which could contribute to the improvement of Russian-Chinese relations. The food topic found me itself.

The HSE education system involves earning several credits for projects during the course of study. In my Master’s program, I chose a project that was conducted by the School of Oriental Studies together with Azbuka Vkusa. Against the backdrop of Covid, we studied how retail is developing in Asian countries. I was doing research on China. And then one of the teachers said that there was an opportunity to do an internship at the UN.

At first I wasn’t interested, but my friend, who had this experience, explained that it was a very interesting track where you act as a manager of an educational course.

I applied for the next intake and was accepted to this project. The internship was online. I helped organize a course for UNITAR (United Nations Institute for Training and Research) and FAO (FAO, Food and Agriculture Organization of the United Nations). The course was designed for officials from the post-Soviet space on the topic of agriculture in international trade agreements.

I thought it was an interesting topic because China and Russia were developing relations in the agricultural sector, so I decided to take it up more seriously and continued to study it in graduate school.

What was my master’s thesis about?

I studied Chinese concepts in global governance. This topic is close to my PhD thesis, where I examine how China promotes its approaches to food security co-operation internationally.

In my master’s degree, I was interested to see how China’s policy ambitions are growing in practical terms, what approaches it offers – whether it is trying to take the place of the United States or is offering something unique.

I decided to look at the theoretical approaches of Chinese scholars and compare them with the statements of Chinese leaders Hu Jintao and Xi Jinping. And I saw that, in principle, the same thing happened to the concept of global governance developed in the West as to many other Western concepts in China – from complete rejection to active participation.

At first, China came out with sharp criticism, claiming that the concept was aimed at Western countries controlling global development. Then with interest – how to apply it with Chinese specifics. Then, gradual testing began in specific areas. For example, Chinese scientists separately studied issues of sovereignty, participation of non-profit organizations. And already at the next stage, they proposed their own approaches.

At the same time, Chinese leader Xi Jinping put forward the concept of a Community of Shared Future for Humanity and the flagship Belt and Road Initiative, and Chinese scholars were studying how to develop global governance together with other countries through these projects.

What is the Community of Shared Destiny for Humanity?

Xi Jinping put forward this concept in 2013 — by the way, he first spoke about it in Moscow, at MGIMO. At the first stage, it was quite simple, it could be characterized by his words: “In me there is you, in you there is me.” The world is interconnected, and we need to manage things together, because if one participant starts having problems (as we saw during the pandemic), they arise for others as well.

A more correct translation of the name is “the concept of a common destiny.” “A common destiny” implies unification. And China insists that everyone has the right to follow their own path of development, and this community is expressed in the fact that we develop together, but in different ways.

Why China Believes the World Needs Food Security

China is primarily interested in ensuring internal security. It relies on the concept of self-sufficiency. This issue is particularly sensitive for it. In the past, periods of famine were associated with political instability.

During the Cold War, when China suffered famine, the country also faced a food embargo from the United States. And now China believes that “it must hold the rice bowl firmly in its own hands,” as Xi Jinping says.

But having joined the WTO and participated in world trade, one cannot be completely autonomous. If there are problems in the food security sphere somewhere, it affects everyone. China is interested in maintaining general world stability. It is also developing cooperation in the “south-south” direction. This is cooperation between a developing country and a similar country, where it acts not as a donor, but as a partner, sharing its experience in solving problems.

In the area of food security, China’s experience is a strong case: the country was able to defeat hunger with very few resources, land and water. Therefore, this is one of the key areas for cooperation with developing countries. China focuses on them, and mainly seeks to develop partnerships with them.

Russian-Chinese relations

Our relations are now at the peak of prosperity. During the Cold War, Sinologists had a hard time. Relations were tense, we had different views on what communism should be. The Chinese reacted quite sharply to the debunking of Stalin’s personality cult. We had border conflicts. China then, especially against the backdrop of rapprochement with the United States, diverged even more from the USSR.

I remember my first academic supervisor in my bachelor’s degree told me that he was criticized in his close circle for studying the language of a country where he would never go, with which we are at odds. But he said that he was right. The prerequisites for normalizing relations began to emerge in the Brezhnev era, later the issues of demarcation and delimitation of the border were resolved, economic relations also developed, and now our relations have become the best.

What results and achievements I am proud of

I spent the last year in China, and returned in July. I was accepted to the New Sinology program for postgraduate students. It is designed to develop new approaches to China studies, building connections so that scholars can see their subject up close. I chose Renmin University of China, one of the largest in Beijing. I was able to work on my topic with a Chinese supervisor, Professor Song Wei, who is developing the theoretical framework I used in my work.

My other achievements are not really in the scientific sphere. Within my center, I am actively involved in the implementation of joint humanitarian projects between Russia and China.

We organized a Russian-Chinese summer school for students, and we had a project called “China Perspective,” where students from our department met with China experts and learned how to build a career in cooperation with the PRC.

Basically, my journey of getting to know HSE and CCEIS began with me being a participant in the Russian-Chinese summer school — the 9th intake. And the next time, I was already on the organizing committee. The school was held online because of COVID, but there were many participants, some even joined from Brazil.

What I dream about

I am very interested in getting more field experience. For example, going to Chinese villages and talking to farmers. In China, most agricultural products are still produced on small farmsteads.

Where I was in China

I traveled a lot around China, visited ten cities: Beijing, Shanghai, Shenzhen, Hangzhou, Suzhou, Xi’an, Luoyang, Tianjin, Chengdu and Chongqing. In Shanghai, colleagues from my center organized a conference of the Valdai Club together with the East China Normal University. I was included in the delegation.

There was also a trip to a conference in Shenzhen, to MSU-PPI – a joint university of Moscow State University and Beijing Polytechnic University. I already went to other cities with friends, to immerse myself in Chinese culture. A guy from India studied with me on the program, we became friends, he was more advanced in studying Chinese culture, and I went on my first trip with him.

Science for me is a way of life, a space of connections. You are constantly looking for something to talk about, something to study.

If I hadn’t become a scientist, I could have become a manager or producer of educational courses in the humanities. I still combine this with my scientific career, but I would have concentrated on it.

Who would I like to meet?

For my dissertation, I would like to meet the first FAO Secretary-General, John Boyd Orr, and talk more about his failed initiatives. My research is more in the area of international cooperation, while his research is specifically looking at how certain policies reduce malnutrition in the world.

I was very inspired by the history of the creation of FAO. Boyd Orr was the first Secretary-General, he stood at its origins. He advocated a comprehensive approach to food security. At that time, food security was considered to be only access to products and their availability. He suggested looking at the problem more broadly and advocated that the newly formed organization should control not only development issues and information collection, but also trade, production, and food delivery.

For example, during World War II, scientists discovered that if you increase the rations for pregnant women, then infant mortality drops sharply. They made several such discoveries, were inspired, and thought that this new knowledge would allow them to significantly reduce hunger within the organization.

But due to the onset of the Cold War, due to the importance and criticality of this topic for the world’s major powers, there was not enough space for trust to be created so that a common supranational structure in the form of a UN institution could control all these processes.

What my typical day looks like

Now my typical day is loaded with work: the last year of graduate school, finishing my dissertation, going to the pre-defense. So I wake up, have breakfast, go to work and sit here for a long time. I solve work issues, and when I have a free minute, I finish the text of the dissertation.

What will I do after my defense?

I will continue working at CCEMI. I think that there will be more time for scientific work. I would like to study the topic of Russian-Chinese agricultural cooperation in more detail. It is also interesting to look at the development of the foodtech sphere in China, startups in this area. I would also try to publish in Chinese journals. They are not taken into account in our systems, which is critical for a postgraduate student, and after the defense this issue will no longer be so acute.

Do I get burnout?

I think it was at the beginning, when I didn’t understand how to combine work and study, but here my colleagues helped. We have a friendly atmosphere in the team, everyone supports each other. I adhere to the approach that there are always many interesting projects, but it is important to refuse most of them and concentrate on the most important, otherwise burnout can occur.

What are my interests besides science?

I love yoga. It helps me maintain a sports regimen during periods of intense work. I also like digital drawing, sometimes I even do something design-related. At the launch stage of our project “Chinese Perspective”, I made posters for the VKontakte group.

Where do I recommend starting your acquaintance with China?

I would recommend looking at VK groups dedicated to China. In our Russian-speaking community, for example, there is a group called “Grey Mocha” that publishes cultural notes about China. The Vyshka Chinese Club also provides a lot of useful information.

China has its own social networks. If you want to watch Chinese videos, you should go not to YouTube, but to Bilibili and Kuaishou. WeChat is a must to communicate with Chinese colleagues. They have an interesting service called “Little Red Book” — something like a combination of Instagram and Telegram, it helped me a lot while traveling around China. You can type in “Tasty places there,” and it will show you. You could even find out which of the many cafeterias at my university serves the best food. Or figure out how to take a photo in the Temple of Heaven without people being visible. But to immerse yourself in the Chinese blogosphere, you need to know the language and understand how it works. If you come to China with only English, it will be more difficult.

The leading contemporary Chinese writer

Probably Mo Yan. In the book “Frogs” he describes the social reality of the “One Family – One Child” era. I also liked the plot of the book “Children of the Herd Age” written by Liu Zhenyun. One of the stories describes how a man gave a large ransom for a woman, and she ran away with this ransom without marrying him, and his sister tries to find her.

Popular Chinese Attractions Among Russians

Beijing, Shanghai and Harbin — because of the proximity of the border. In Beijing, the heritage of ancient culture is interesting: the Forbidden City, the Temple of Heaven, the Great Wall of China. In Shanghai, people walk along the embankment, look at the Pearl Tower, there are more monuments of Western culture there. Hainan Island is also popular, especially among residents of Siberia and the Far East. The sea there is very clean. There are many interesting delicacies, for example, candies made from shark meat. Other destinations are for more advanced tourists who are also interested in nature. For example, the province of Sichuan, where pandas live and there are national parks.

Differences between Western and Chinese culture

There are, and very strong ones. In China, they tend to be collectivist, not individualistic. We have the concept of conscience, and they have shame. This is a capacious topic, it is difficult to talk about briefly, but it can be outlined with a series of illustrations by Chinese artist Yan Liu.

What was the last thing I read and watched?

Our colleague Ivan Yuryevich Zuenko recently published a book, “China in the Era of Xi Jinping.” I read it and even attended the presentation.

Because of my dissertation, everything is about China now, and I watch something to support Chinese. For example, the talk show “This is China” with Professor Zhang Weiwei and the program “Round Table” with the popular host Dou Wentao.

Advice to young scientists

Get involved in the scientific community early on, as talking to colleagues helps you understand early on what to watch out for and what new and interesting perspectives there are on the issues you’re studying.

Try to publish and speak at conferences. The sooner you gain such experience, the easier it will be to move along this path. And for a sinologist, it is especially important to have your own knowledge base and know exactly where to find certain materials. Order disciplines and helps in scientific work.

Favorite place in Moscow

VDNKh. I lived there during my first year of graduate school, and often walked there. This place is associated with my first pleasant memories after moving to Moscow.

Favorite places in Beijing

First of all, Beihai Park. Chinese parks are different from ours. When I came there for the first time in the evening, I felt like I was in a fairy tale. I also love Houhai, it’s also in the center, a walking place around the lake. And Qianmen Street, it’s quite lively, there are a lot of Chinese eateries, street food.

At first, I didn’t quite have the right idea of Beijing. I thought it was high-rise and modern. But if you travel around southern cities, you’ll notice that Beijing has many low buildings in the center and it’s not so densely built up. There are hutongs on Qianmen Street – ancient buildings. And a nice coffee shop called Metal Hands.

Chinese cuisine

I like it. I often ate xiao long bao (steamed meat buns like dumplings), malatan (a spicy soup where you put the ingredients yourself), and different types of beef noodles. Because of my Indian friends, I also fell in love with Indian food. But in general, there are a couple of places in Beijing where you can eat Russian food. When I started missing mashed potatoes with a cutlet, it was easy to get them.

Where would I go in China

See the natural attractions near the cities of Chengdu and Chongqing. You need to go there in a group and think everything through in advance. There are two large national parks near Chengdu. And next to Chongqing is the Wulong Karst geological park. And there is also a beautiful place Zhangjiajie, you also need to go there for five days, preferably with a group and a guide.

Please note: This information is raw content directly from the source of the information. It is exactly what the source states and does not reflect the position of MIL-OSI or its clients.

MIL OSI Russia News –

January 25, 2025
MIL-OSI Banking: Elizabeth McCaul: Fading crises, shifting priorities – a supervisory perspective on the regulatory cycle

Source: Bank for International Settlements

Thank you very much for inviting me to today’s conference.

I regret that I am not able to join you in person but I am sure that you are having very productive and insightful discussions.

The title of the conference, “EU banking regulation at a turning point”, indicates that the regulatory environment seems to be undergoing a fundamental shift. While the years following the global financial crisis have been devoted to reinforcing the regulatory framework to prevent a recurrence of similar failures, the public debate seems to have shifted away from focusing on safety and stability towards placing greater emphasis on competitiveness.

Shifts in public opinion on regulation are nothing new. There is a natural ebb and flow of regulatory intensity driven by crises, economic conditions and political priorities. After a crisis, there is often strong public support for stricter regulation, which tends to weaken over time as the crisis recedes.

In today’s remarks, I want to give you a supervisory perspective on the regulatory cycle and its shifting priorities.

I would like to make three main points.

First, it is a fundamental misconception to frame safety and competitiveness as opposing forces. A stable and secure financial system forms the bedrock of long-term competitiveness.

Second, the post-crisis reform agenda in Europe is not yet complete. Notably, the banking union is still unfinished and the capital markets union requires more ambition. For me, there is a clear link here between these important policy objectives and buttressing the competitiveness of the sector.

Third, we need to tackle emerging risks, such as the growth of the non-bank financial intermediation (NBFI) sector, and the rising geopolitical risk, which manifests itself in a number of ways, including in concerns about cyberattacks. Tackling these risks will contribute towards ensuring the continued resilience of the financial system.

Heeding the lessons from the past

As the great financial crisis fades into the rearview mirror, it seems that competitiveness considerations have taken the wheel. However, just as guardrails on a motorway do not impede drivers but ensure they stay on the road, a robust regulatory framework sets safe boundaries for banks, enabling them to fulfil their role of lending to the real economy.

Let me take this traffic metaphor even further. There are countless studies showing that speed limits not only reduce danger but also minimise congestion, thereby reducing the overall travel time. It’s a fallacy to think that higher speed limits mean faster travel, just as laxer regulation does not lead to more sustainable growth. Similarly, regulatory competition between jurisdictions is more likely to lead to a race to the bottom than to a robust regulatory framework.

Research consistently shows that well-capitalised banks are better positioned to support the real economy thanks to their enhanced capacity to absorb losses and maintain stability, even under financial stress. Specifically, impact assessments for the Basel reforms have demonstrated that while there may be short-term economic costs, these are far outweighed by the long-term benefits, most notably increased economic resilience.

As for concerns over competitive advantages or disadvantages, I am not convinced that EU banks are at a disadvantage. In fact, the notion that regulatory requirements are more stringent in the EU than in the United States does not hold up to scrutiny. Evidence shows that global systemically important banks (G-SIBs) in the United States face slightly higher capital requirements than their EU counterparts.

Furthermore, when we account for differences in how banks calculate risk-weighted assets, it becomes clear that average capital requirements for significant institutions in the banking union would be somewhat higher under US rules. This directly challenges some of the industry reports that suggest otherwise.¹

Completing the banking union and the capital markets union

Let me now move to my second point: the need to complete the banking union and the capital markets union.

In recent years, Europe’s banking sector has demonstrated resilience amid unforeseen challenges, including the coronavirus pandemic, the energy supply shock following Russia’s invasion of Ukraine and high inflation.

This resilience is reflected in the numbers: in 2015 the average ratio of non-performing loans (NPLs) for significant banks in the banking union was 7.5%, at a time when some banking systems had ratios close to 50%. At the end of the second quarter of this year, this ratio had decreased to 2.3%, driven mainly by the reduction of NPLs in high-NPL banks.

Similarly, the Common Equity Tier 1 ratio for significant banks has risen from 12.7% in 2015 to 15.8% today. Bank profitability has increased considerably in recent quarters, benefiting from higher interest rates, and return on equity now stands at 10.1%.

This resilience is also a result of the strengthened supervisory and regulatory framework after the global financial crisis, including the creation of European banking supervision. The limited repercussions from the March 2023 banking sector turmoil stand as a testament to the robustness of our banking union.

However, while we have made significant strides to build a more resilient banking union, the journey is far from complete. Without a European deposit insurance scheme, there cannot be a truly single banking system. Depositors across the banking union should have a uniform level of confidence that their deposits are safeguarded during crises, irrespective of their Member State or the location of their bank.

We must also enhance the crisis management and deposit insurance (CMDI) framework to effectively manage the failures of small and medium-sized banks. It is crucial that authorities have the flexibility to act and that adequate funding is available for a diverse range of scenarios.

Losses from bank failures should primarily be borne by the bank’s shareholders and creditors. Nonetheless, the framework should also allow for the use of industry-funded safety nets when necessary to protect financial stability.

In particular, deposit guarantee schemes should be equipped to support the use of crisis management tools, for example by contributing to meeting the bail-in conditions for gaining access to the Single Resolution Fund. Smaller banks, which often rely heavily on deposits as a funding source, may face challenges in issuing financial instruments that could be bailed in if the bank fails.

This issue can be mitigated by clarifying and broadening the least cost test and introducing a general depositor preference based on an equal ranking of all deposits.

The current review of the CMDI framework is an opportunity to bring durable fixes to the flaws I have just described. We hope the co-legislators will reach an ambitious agreement and not settle for small-scale tweaks that would largely preserve the current – and less than satisfactory – status quo.

Liquidity in resolution is another important aspect of crisis management where progress is needed. A resolved bank should primarily rely on market funding for liquidity, but a public liquidity backstop can be critical to maintain confidence in the resolution process, as demonstrated by recent crises in other jurisdictions.

Unlike other jurisdictions, however, the banking union lacks an effective public sector backstop mechanism to provide this temporary liquidity funding. We therefore encourage all EU stakeholders to resume discussions on setting up a European-level public backstop to ensure liquidity is provided to banks facing resolution in a timely and effective manner.

The incompleteness of the banking union is a significant impediment to creating a truly integrated banking sector in Europe and optimising its competitiveness. Achieving this goal means removing unnecessary barriers to cross-border banking and enabling cross-border groups to manage liquidity and capital at the group level. A fully integrated, cross-border European banking landscape would not only make banks more efficient but also more resilient to domestic shocks, by enabling them to diversify their risks and revenue streams. This would contribute to private risk sharing and enhance the overall economy’s robustness and efficiency, benefiting European citizens.

Let me now turn to the second element of what is missing in Europe’s financial architecture: the capital markets union.

The capital markets union and the banking union are complementary projects. Progress on the capital markets union provides opportunities for banks and vice versa. And deepening the capital markets union is vital for the European economy to attract the necessary private investments to support innovation and the digital and green transitions, thus bolstering EU competitiveness.

For banks, this means more cross-border activities, which would make them more competitive compared with their international counterparts. In a more integrated pan-European capital market, banks could fully exploit economies of scale by offering similar products and services across multiple countries.

Targeted harmonisations across Member States could facilitate such cross-border lending, enabling banks to better assess risks and opportunities from borrowers in other Member States. Completing the banking union would significantly accelerate the push towards a truly integrated European banking landscape.

Securitisation is another measure to advance the capital markets union where banks play a key role. Given the constraints on banks’ balance sheets, capital markets can complement bank lending and increase the financing available to the private sector while transferring risks to other intermediaries. Securitisation is crucial as it provides a diversified funding base for banks, a tool to transfer credit risks and new assets for investors. This can also create space for additional lending to the economy.

Tackling emerging risks – non-bank financial institutions and rising geopolitical risks

While non-banks may help in financing the significant needs of the twin green and digital transition, they also necessitate adequate regulation and close monitoring.

The growth in the NBFI sector is staggering. In the euro area the sector has more than doubled in size, from €15 trillion in 2008 to €32 trillion in 2024. Globally, the numbers are even more worrying, with the sector growing from €87 trillion in 2008 to €200 trillion in 2022.

The private credit market is a particular concern. It accounts for €1.6 trillion of the global market and has also seen significant growth recently. The European private credit market growth is accelerating by 29% in the last three years, but the market is still much smaller than the market in the United States, which is where investors and asset managers are often based. The end investors are pension funds, sovereign wealth funds and insurance firms, but banks play a significant role in leveraging and providing bridge loans at various levels to credit funds. We recently completed a deep dive on the topic and found that banks are not able to fully identify the myriad ways they have exposure to private credit funds. Therefore, concentration risk could be significant.

We know that risk from the NBFI sector can materialise through various channels. One such channel is the correlation of exposures, especially given the growth in private credit and equity markets. We supervisors do not have a full picture of the level of exposure and correlations between NBFI balance sheets and bank lending arrangements, lines of credit or derivatives to and from NBFIs.

To make the market less opaque, we should further harmonise, enhance and expand reporting requirements and make information-sharing between authorities easier at the global level.

The growth in the NBFI market is not the only concern we have about the current risk environment. There is ample evidence in our constant media feeds of rising risks. We need only switch on our news channels to see frightening images of human tragedy, Russia’s invasion of Ukraine, the widening conflagration in the Middle East, and even what may be the most significant military exercise yet conducted by Chinese armed forces encircling Taiwan. There are many reasons to be concerned about rising geopolitical risk, such as supply chain disruptions, energy disruptions and inflationary pressures. They all pose threats to resilience. I’d like to highlight one resulting risk – the increased risk of cyberattacks, in particular the increased threat from nation state actors. Our IT risk questionnaire shows a significant uptick year after year. In 2022, 50% of our supervised entities were subject to at least one successful cyber attack, rising to 68% percent in 2023 as the upcoming publication of our annual horizontal analysis will show. On an absolute basis the number of reports has also risen significantly. The number of cyber incident reports that we have received in 2023 was 77% higher than in 2022, and we expect the total number of incident reports in 2024 to be similar to 2023. The IMF also reports that the number of attacks has doubled since the pandemic.

Conclusion

Let me conclude.

While the public debate on banking regulation may have shifted, we need to continue to uphold robust regulatory frameworks that balance safety with competitiveness. Completing the banking union and the capital markets union remains a critical priority and one that can enhance the overall competitiveness of the sector. In addition, we must remain vigilant in addressing the emerging risks posed by the growing NBFI sector and rising geopolitical risks that threaten resilience.

By staying committed to these priorities, we can build a stronger, more integrated European financial system that supports innovation, protects consumers and enhances the overall resilience of our economy for all Europe’s citizens. Crises fading in the rearview mirror should not be a harbinger of shifting supervisory and regulatory priorities such that a weaker, less competitive and less resilient sector is the result.

MIL OSI Global Banks –

January 25, 2025
MIL-OSI Global: RFK Jr.’s pivot to Trump is a journey taken by many populists swept along the left-to-right alternative media pipeline

Source: The Conversation – USA – By Rachel Meade, Lecturer of Political Science, Boston University

When Robert F. Kennedy Jr. ended his independent presidential run in August 2024 and endorsed Republican Donald Trump, it might have seemed a surprising turn of events.

Kennedy began his presidential run as a Democrat and is the scion of a Democratic dynasty. Nephew to former President John F. Kennedy and the son of former Attorney General Robert F. Kennedy, Kennedy spent most of his career as a lawyer representing environmental groups that sued polluting corporations and municipalities.

Yet Kennedy, 70, has long held positions that put him at odds with the Democratic mainstream. He pushes public health misinformation around vaccines and HIV/AIDS, opposes U.S. military involvement in foreign wars, including in Ukraine, and claims that the CIA assassinated his uncle.

Kennedy’s ideologically mixed politics are hard to categorize in traditional left-right terms.

My political science research finds that Kennedy’s journey from left-aligned skepticism into Trumpism is part of a broader trend of contemporary left-to-right populist transformations happening across the United States.

Rise of the populist alternative media

Populism is a political story that presents the good “people” of a nation as in a struggle against its “elites,” who have corrupted democratic institutions to further their own selfish interests. It cuts across the ideological spectrum, often combining left-wing economic critiques with right-wing cultural ones.

Based on my research, I find that Kennedy uses a populist style of speech that matches the rhetoric of today’s online alternative media, also known as the “alternative influence network.”

If populism cuts across the ideological spectrum, so does the alternative media.

This network of politically diverse independent podcasters, YouTube hosts and other creators connects with young, politically disaffected audiences by mixing politics with comedy and pop culture, and presenting themselves as embattled defenders of free thinking – in opposition to mainstream media and mainstream parties.

Top-rated shows include “Breaking Points,” “Stay Free with Russell Brand,” “The Joe Rogan Experience,” The Culture War with Tim Pool and “This Past Weekend w/ Theo Von.”

While many of these shows have been around since the 2010s, the network expanded throughout the Trump era. Their popularity skyrocketed during the COVID-19 pandemic, when public distrust in government, anger over pandemic restrictions and vaccine skepticism surged.

These shows hosted Kennedy frequently throughout his presidential run in 2023 and 2024.

Kennedy finds his audience

I analyzed a set of Kennedy’s appearances for this story. Both Kennedy and alternative media hosts claim to care about “the real issues” facing Americans such as war, corporate and political malfeasance and economic troubles. They condemn the “mainstream” for promoting frivolous “culture war” topics related to race and identity politics.

Kennedy and the alternative media hosts also combine left and right arguments in a typically populist way. They claim that corporations control the government and that liberals and corporations censor free speech.

For example, on a May 2024, episode of “Stay Free with Russell Brand,” Brand asserted that corrupt institutions are backed by the “deep state.” He asked Kennedy how he would fight these powerful interests.

“The major agencies of government have all been captured by the industries they’re supposed to regulate and act as sock puppets serving the mercantile interests of these big corporations,” responded Kennedy. “I have a particular ability to unravel that because I’ve litigated against so many of these agencies.”

My research found that Kennedy often bonded with his alternative media hosts over his perception that liberal media sources – allegedly controlled by the Democratic National Committee or the CIA – were censoring his campaign.

Like Kennedy, alternative media hosts often identify as former or disaffected Democrats. Many used to work at mainstream left news sites, where they say they experienced censorship.

‘This little island of free speech’

In a June 2023 episode of “The Joe Rogan Experience,” Rogan explained that he no longer identifies as a liberal because of the “orthodoxy it preaches” around issues like vaccines. He then cited YouTube’s removal of some of Kennedy’s vaccine-related videos for violating its COVID-19 misinformation policy.

Kennedy had just spent 90 minutes outlining his journey toward vaccine skepticism, which started with meeting a mother who believed vaccines caused her son’s autism.

“If a woman tells you something about her child, you should listen,” he said.

Kennedy also described being convinced by a set of studies that public health officials had ignored.

“Trust the experts is not a function of science, it’s a function of religion,” he said. “I’ve been litigating 40 years; there’s experts on both sides.”

Afterward, he thanked Rogan for maintaining “this little island of free speech in a desert of suppression and of critical thinking.”

Kennedy reiterated this point in the Aug. 23, 2024, speech that ended his campaign, saying the “alternative media” had kept his ideas alive, while the mainstream networks had shut him out despite his historically high third-party poll numbers of 15% to 20%.

“The DNC-allied mainstream media networks maintained a near-perfect embargo on interviews with me,” Kennedy said.

Speaking directly to the reporters in the room, he added, “Your institutions and media made themselves government mouthpieces and stenographers for the organs of power.”

Left-to-right pipeline

Trust in a range of U.S. institutions is at historical lows. Americans on both the right and the left are skeptical of power and crave radical change.

Alternative media hosts tap into this desire, helping to push some disaffected listeners down the same left-to-right pipeline that landed Kennedy in Trump’s orbit.

Trump and his allies are adept at harnessing the power of the alternative media ecosystem. Trump has appeared on male-centric shows like “This Past Weekend w/ Theo Von and ”The Joe Rogan Experience,“ and he founded the alternative social media platform Truth Social.

Trump’s former adviser Steve Bannon hosts an influential podcast called the “War Room” on another MAGA alternative media platform, Rumble. Known for its fiery populist rhetoric, the “War Room” broadcasts live for an astonishing 22 hours a week.

Until recently, Democrats have largely embraced traditional media. During the first months of her 2024 presidential campaign, Vice President Kamala Harris appeared on CBS’ “60 Minutes,” ABC’s “The View” and MSNBC’s “Stephanie Ruhle.”

Then, on Oct. 12, Harris appeared on “Call her Daddy.” Spotify’s second-most popular podcast, it has a young, female audience. Days later, she sat down for an interview with Fox News and is reportedly in talks to appear on Joe Rogan’s show.

Kennedy might approve of all this aisle-crossing.

“Step outside the culture war!” he tweeted in July 2024. “Step outside the politics of hating the other side!”

Rachel Meade does not work for, consult, own shares in or receive funding from any company or organization that would benefit from this article, and has disclosed no relevant affiliations beyond their academic appointment.

– ref. RFK Jr.’s pivot to Trump is a journey taken by many populists swept along the left-to-right alternative media pipeline – https://theconversation.com/rfk-jr-s-pivot-to-trump-is-a-journey-taken-by-many-populists-swept-along-the-left-to-right-alternative-media-pipeline-236828

MIL OSI – Global Reports –

January 25, 2025

Category: Covid 19

Related news features

Travel tips

2017-2021: Trump and Pence on trade

2021-today: Biden and Harris on trade

Presidential powers and influence on trade

Related news features

Travel tips

The New Zealand Embassy Washington DC, United States of America

The New Zealand Consulate-General Los Angeles, United States of America

New Zealand Consulate-General Honolulu, United States of America

New Zealand Consulate-General New York, United States of America

New Zealand Consulate Atlanta, United States of America

New Zealand Consulate Boston, United States of America

New Zealand Consulate Chicago, United States of America

New Zealand Consulate Houston, United States of America

New Zealand Consulate Oregon, United States of America

New Zealand Consulate Sacramento, United States of America

New Zealand Consulate Salt Lake City, United States of America

New Zealand Consulate San Francisco (Northern California), United States of America

New Zealand Consulate Seattle, United States of America

Australians should be compensated after vaccine injuries – not just during pandemics

Not getting vaccinated isn’t just about a lack of trust

Invest in community-led strategies to improve uptake

Sharing research results

Comfortable format

List of speakers

Updates to this page

Related news features

Travel tips

Related news features

Travel tips

The New Zealand Embassy Mexico City, Mexico is accredited to Guatemala

New Zealand Honorary Consulate Guatemala City, Guatemala

How I got started in science

What am I studying?

What was my master’s thesis about?

What is the Community of Shared Destiny for Humanity?

Why China Believes the World Needs Food Security

Russian-Chinese relations

What results and achievements I am proud of

What I dream about

Where I was in China

Who would I like to meet?

What my typical day looks like

What will I do after my defense?

Do I get burnout?

What are my interests besides science?

Where do I recommend starting your acquaintance with China?

The leading contemporary Chinese writer

Popular Chinese Attractions Among Russians

Differences between Western and Chinese culture

What was the last thing I read and watched?

Advice to young scientists

Favorite place in Moscow

Favorite places in Beijing

Chinese cuisine

Where would I go in China

Heeding the lessons from the past

Completing the banking union and the capital markets union

Tackling emerging risks – non-bank financial institutions and rising geopolitical risks

Conclusion

Rise of the populist alternative media

Kennedy finds his audience

‘This little island of free speech’

Left-to-right pipeline